Senographe Essential Mastógrafo

Senographe Essential
Operator Manual
5307915-10-1EN
Revision 3
© 2006-2022 by General Electric Company
All Rights Reserved
Senographe Essential 5307915-10-1EN
Operator Manual Revision 3
This page is intentionally left blank.
Page no. 2 Cover_Senographe_Essential_OM.fm

IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION
CAUTION
If not properly used, x-ray equipment may cause injury. Accordingly, it is your obligation to
confirm that the instructions herein contained are thoroughly read and understood by everyone
who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General
Electric Company, Healthcare Technologies, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this
equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of certain protections against x-radiation
other than the useful beam, no feasible design of equipment can provide complete protection
from all potential injury. Nor can any feasible design force the operator to take adequate
precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully
knowledgeable about the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910
Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International
Commission on Radiation Protection. It is your obligation and responsibility to take adequate
steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Healthcare
Technologies, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage, which
may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective materials and devices are
available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used in accordance your site’s clinical
practice.
radiation warning.fm Page no. 3

Page no. 4 radiation warning.fm

Favorite links for Operators
Use these links for quick access to frequently used information in the Operator Manual:
Physical description
- 5 Gantry on page 39
- 6 Accessories on page 51
- 7 Control Station on page 59
- 8 X-Ray Console on page 65
- 9 Generator Cabinet on page 71
Procedures for examination
- 3 Safety recommendations on page 29
- 10 Examination steering guide on page 73
Operator Messages
- 2 Operator messages displayed on the X-ray Console on page 212
- 3 Operator messages displayed on the AWS LCD monitor on page 225
- 4 Operator messages on the Gantry readout on page 229
- 4-1 Messages regarding breast supports on page 229
- 4-2 Messages regarding FOV (Field Of View) on page 232
- 4-3 Error messages on page 234
Procedures for System Hygiene and Planned Maintenance
- 25 System Hygiene on page 205
- 1 Introduction on page 205
- 1-1 Levels of hygienic maintenance required on page 205
- 2 General precautions for hygienic maintenance on page 206
- 3 Precautions for cleaning specific parts on page 207
- 4 Suggested hygienic cleaning products on page 208
- 27 Planned Maintenance on page 251
- 2 Planned maintenance performed by the Field Service Representative on page 251
- 3 Planned maintenance performed by the Radiologic Technologist on page 251
- 4 Planned maintenance performed by the Medical Physicist on page 251
Favorites_for_operator.fm Page no. 5

Page no. 6 Favorites_for_operator.fm

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Favorite links for Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 1. Publication presentation

1. Applicability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2. How to order a paper version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. How to access the electronic version of a manual on a website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4. How to use the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5. Conventions for this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6. Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 2. Standards and regulations

1. Standards compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2. Installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. Patient information confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4. De-Installation and Recycling requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5. Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6. Control of Pollution caused by Electronic Information Products (EIP’s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 3. Safety recommendations

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2. Potential adverse effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. Before starting an examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5. Operator protection against radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6. When performing an examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7. Storage of acquired images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8. Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 4. Product presentation

1. Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2. System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3. System options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4. Senographe Essential accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 5. Gantry
1. Gantry components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TOC.fm Page no. 7

Table of Contents
2. Gantry Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3. X-Ray tube head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4. Compression carriage and Paddle holder assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5. Image Receptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6. Gantry readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7. Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Chapter 6. Accessories
1. Compression paddles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2. Breast supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3. 2D Localization accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4. Patient positioning accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5. Patient identification accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
6. Image quality control accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 7. Control Station

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2. AWS Operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3. Bar code scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 8. X-Ray Console

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2. Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3. Buttons, switches and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4. X-ray Console set-up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Chapter 9. Generator Cabinet

1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chapter 10. Examination steering guide

1. Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2. Power up and startup the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3. Receive the patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4. Prepare examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5. Examination: acquire the 1st image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6. Acquire other images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7. Working with images resulting from an examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8. Store images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9. Power off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Page no. 8 TOC.fm

Table of Contents
Chapter 11. Initial training and set-up

1. Operator profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2. Training program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3. User account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4. Configuring the X-ray Console set-up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Chapter 12. Startup and shutdown

1. Startup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2. System shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3. Emergency stop or shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4. Gantry reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5. Generator Cabinet push-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter 13. User session and account management

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2. Opening an administrative session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3. Creating and deleting users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4. Changing the password for an existing user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5. Setting configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6. Managing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7. Reading access control log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Chapter 14. View name selection

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2. Coding principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3. View names code chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4. Core View name - selected automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5. Core View name modified manually (standing or sitting patients) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6. Core View names for recumbent patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 15. Setting FOV size and position

1. Setting FOV size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2. Setting FOV position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3. Initial FOV size and position - available FOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 16. AOP and Manual exposure modes

1. AOP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2. Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3. Implants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
TOC.fm Page no. 9

Table of Contents
Chapter 17. Browser

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2. Browser restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3. System shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4. Log off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5. Browser display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6. Browser management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7. Network transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8. Tools menu utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9. Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 18. Worklist

1. Worklist function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2. Image acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3. Bar code scanner option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Chapter 19. Modality Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3. PPS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4. PPS in the Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chapter 20. Viewer

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2. View Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3. Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4. Function panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5. Scrapbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Chapter 21. Image processing and display

1. Raw image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2. Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3. Processed image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4. Image display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5. Next exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 22. Printing

1. Printing conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2. Printer management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3. Print functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Page no. 10 TOC.fm

Table of Contents
Chapter 23. Interchange media

1. Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2. Using the interchange media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 24. 2D Localization examination

1. Face shield and 2D Cross-hair device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2. 2D Localization examination procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3. Cleaning and disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 25. System Hygiene

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
2. General precautions for hygienic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
3. Precautions for cleaning specific parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4. Suggested hygienic cleaning products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Chapter 26. Operator messages

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
2. Operator messages displayed on the X-ray Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3. Operator messages displayed on the AWS LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4. Operator messages on the Gantry readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chapter 27. Planned Maintenance

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
2. Planned maintenance performed by the Field Service Representative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
3. Planned maintenance performed by the Radiologic Technologist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4. Planned maintenance performed by the Medical Physicist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 28. Specifications

1. Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2. Radiation and filter information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
3. Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4. Ambient light level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5. Tube information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6. Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
7. Intellectual Property rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
8. Trademark information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
TOC.fm Page no. 11

Table of Contents
Page no. 12 TOC.fm

Publication presentation
Chapter 1 Publication presentation
1 Applicability
This manual is provided for Senographe Essential system Operators.
The manual describes the use of the Senographe Essential system in its most complete configuration. If
any of the options described in this manual are not included in your system, skip the corresponding
chapter or sections.
See your GE Representative for the options available with the Senographe Essential system.
2 How to order a paper version

A paper copy of the following manuals can be ordered at no additional cost:
- the Operator Manual (reference: 5307915-10-1EN)
- the Quality Control Manual; to check the reference of the manual to order, read the reference under
the photo on the first page of the manual embedded on your system (see chapter Accessing
Manuals, section Viewing Manuals embedded on the Control station in the Operator Manual Extract).
Please send a request to your Sales or Service representative. They will transfer your request to
[email protected]. In the European Union, in application of the EU Commission Regulation
on electronic instructions for use of medical devices, your request should be processed within seven
days.
Publication-Presentation_OM.fm Page no. 13 Chapter 1

3 How to access the electronic version of a manual on a website

Each system is shipped with user and service technical publications. These technical publications are
available for download on a dedicated GE Website.
The Operator Manual and all other technical publications related to this medical device are available on
the Internet at: https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary
1. Go to https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary.
2. Click .
The customer documentation portal opens.
3. Enter the part number of the technical publication (for example 5307915-10-1EN) in the search field
and click [Search].
search field
By default, the search is performed by status "Current Revisions".

4. Click on the download button .
5. In the Copyright window, click [ACCEPT].
The download starts.
Chapter 1 Page no. 14 Publication-Presentation_OM.fm

4 How to use the manual

4-1 Chapter types
This manual is arranged in chapters, each of which contains one type of information:
• Physical description chapters
Intended to answer the question: “What is it?”.
Usually arranged according to physical location of the various parts.
• Functional description chapters
Intended to answer the question: “How does the system behave?”.
• Procedural description chapters
Intended to answer the questions: “How do I …?”, or “What do I do now?”.
Arranged contextually according to the situation in which the Operator is operating, and follows the
sequence of an examination.
4-2 Links between different chapters

Each type of information can refer to another. For example, a procedural chapter describing how to use
a particular function may contain instructions which require the Operator to know how to find some piece
of software or hardware (referring to a physical description), and to understand how the function works
(referring to a functional description).
chapters.
Procedural description
chapters.
Functional description
chapters
Chapters are arranged in an order which is intended to suit the learning requirements of a new Operator.
This means that similar types of chapter are not necessarily grouped together.

4-3 List of chapters classified by type

- 5 Gantry on page 39
- 6 Accessories on page 51
- 7 Control Station on page 59
- 8 X-Ray Console on page 65
- 9 Generator Cabinet on page 71
- 28 Specifications on page 255
Functional description
- 14 View name selection on page 103
- 15 Setting FOV size and position on page 109
- 16 AOP and Manual exposure modes on page 113
- 17 Browser on page 119
- 18 Worklist on page 141
- 19 Modality Performed Procedure Step (PPS) on page 149
- 20 Viewer on page 153
- 21 Image processing and display on page 177
- 22 Printing on page 181
- 23 Interchange media on page 193
- 24 2D Localization examination on page 199
Procedural description
- 2 Standards and regulations on page 21
- 3 Safety recommendations on page 29
- 10 Examination steering guide on page 73
- 11 Initial training and set-up on page 85
- 12 Startup and shutdown on page 89
- 13 User session and account management on page 91
- 26 Operator messages on page 211
- 25 System Hygiene on page 205
- 27 Planned Maintenance on page 251

5 Conventions for this manual

5-1 Typographical
• In text describing the Operator interface, italic and bold characters are used to differentiate between
body text and on-screen or hardware captions and labels, entered text, etc.:
- Italics are used for references to hardware items and text which appears on-screen (for example,
menu titles, button labels, on-screen messages, and so on).
- Bold face is used when specific instructions are given for the entry of text or selection of a menu
option, etc. If the operation or text entry includes the use of a keyboard or mouse button, its name
is shown between angle brackets, to distinguish it from entered text, e.g., 123<Enter> would be
written for an instruction to type 123 followed by the Enter or Return key.
• In other text:
- Italics are used when a specific concept is introduced.
- Italic and bold characters may also be used for local emphasis.
- In electronic version of the document, cross-references appear in blue italics.
5-2 Definitions of different types of Warnings

The various safety and cautionary notes throughout this manual are defined as follows:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
! Notice:
Used for instructions to the Operator to prevent damage to property.
Note:
Used to draw attention to information that is important for the Operator to know.

6 Revision History
This table is intentionally left in English.
Date Reference Revision Main modifications
2022-08 5307915-10-1EN Senographe 3 Updated:

Essential Operator Manual - Accessing techpub section
- Help link in last page
- Planned Maintenance chapter (SPR
HCSDM00702702)
2017-10 5307915-10-1EN Senographe 2 Resolution of SPR:

Essential Operator Manual - HCSDM00484123: removal of ISO compliance
statement
- HCSDM00482361: addition of the statement for
the date of the initial CE marking year
2014-05 5307915-10-1EN Senographe 1 Release for CE Removal

Essential Operator Manual Resolution of SPR:
- HCSDM00264929
- CE marking removed from cover page
- CE marking information removed from
chapter 2, section 1 "Standards
compliance".
- HCSDM00272839
- CE marking information updated in
chapter 2, section 1 "Standards
compliance".
- HCSDM00262290
- "Red line" information and associated
image removed from chapter 5, section 5.3
"Installing the breast Support (Bucky or
Magstand)".
2013-11 5307915-9-1EN Senographe 1 Release for Quebec and Indonesia.

- HCSDM00241052 labeling described in the
glossary (chapter 2, §5-2).
- HCSDM00229067 "Imagination at work" and "GE
Healthcare" removed from the manual.
- HCSDM00244788 Bar code reader configuration
removed (chapter 18, §3).
- HCSDM00181932 recovery procedure added in
case of ADS crash during an exam (chapter 3, §7).

2013-03 5307915-8-1EN Senographe 1 New release for SFDA.

- HCSDM00187347 severity of messages updated
in the whole document.
- HCSDM00187732 radiation warning updated on
p3.
- HCSDM00188479 three symbols added on p 22.
- HCSDM00187971 GE Buc address updated on
p19 and on last page.
- HCSDM00187981 update of China information on
last page.
- HCSDM00188433 §6 added in chapter 2.
- HCSDM00110487 §4-1 and 4-2 removed from
chapter 27.
- §8 trademark information added in chapter 28.


Standards and regulations
Chapter 2 Standards and regulations
1 Standards compliance
• If the label is affixed to the product, it complies with Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning
medical devices.
European registered place of business:
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS SCS
283 RUE DE LA MINIERE
78530 BUC France
• The first year of CE marking of this product is 2006.
• Code of Federal Regulations Title 21, Subchapter J - Radiological health.
• Applicable standards from the following organizations:
• Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), an independent testing laboratory,
• Canadian Standards Association (CSA),
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), an international standards organization.
• Medical Device Good Manufacturing Practice Manual issued by the FDA (Food and Drug
Administration, Department of Health and Human Services, USA).
• SFDA:
• Product Name: Mammography X-ray Equipment
• SFDA registration number: SFDA (I) 20133300309
• Product standard number: YZB/FRA 4206-2012
USA/HHS: United States Federal law restricts this device to use by or on the order of a physician.
The original document was written in English.
Use within the patient environment
All components of the Senographe Essential system (Generator Cabinet, Gantry, Control Station)
are designed to be suitable for use within the patient environment, and are compliant with the
relevant standards.
regulatory.fm Page no. 21 Chapter 2

2 Installation requirements
Packing materials
The materials used to pack our equipment are recyclable. They must be collected and processed in
accordance with the regulations in force for the country where the machines or accessories are
unpacked.
Use in the presence of flammable gases
The Senographe Essential must not be used in the presence of flammable gases.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This equipment complies with IEC 60601-1-2 Edition 2 EMC standard for medical devices.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. The equipment may
cause radio frequency interference to other medical and non-medical devices and radio
communications. To provide reasonable protection against such interference, this product complies
with radiated emissions as per CISPR11 Group 1 Class A standard limits.
Detailed requirements and recommendations about power supply distribution and installation are
listed in the Pre-Installation section of the Service Documentation shipped with your system.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by turning the equipment
on and off), the Operator (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by
one or more of the following measure(s):
- reorient or relocate the affected device(s),
- increase the separation between the equipment and the affected device,
- power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device,
- consult the point of purchase or your GE Service Representative for further suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended
interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized
changes or modifications could void the users' authority to operate the equipment.
All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of cables
not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment causing radio frequency
interference.
Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF Signals (Cellular Phones, Transceivers, or Radio
Controlled Products) in the vicinity of this equipment as it may cause performance outside the
published specifications. Recommended separation distances are detailed in the Pre-Installation
section of the Service Documentation shipped with your system. Keep the power to these types of
devices turned off when near this equipment.
The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients, and other
people who may be around this equipment to comply fully with the above requirement.
Further data and recommendations for meeting Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements
for a typical installation are given in the Pre-Installation section of the Service Documentation
shipped with your system. Note that the magnetic field of an MRI device located nearby may cause a
risk of interference. Magnetic field amplitude limits are specified in the Pre-Installation section of the
Service Documentation shipped with your system.
Chapter 2 Page no. 22 regulatory.fm

3 Patient information confidentiality

The equipment includes one or more hard disk drives which may hold medical data related to patients.
Such equipment may in some countries be subject to regulations concerning the processing of personal
data and the free circulation of such data. It is strongly recommended that access to patient files be
protected from all the persons not in medical attendance. Access to the Senographe Essential
applications is protected by passwords. These passwords are set initially during installation on site. Non-
trivial logins and passwords must be set to minimise the risk of security and confidentiality issues. It is
the responsibility of the users to prevent unauthorized access to the Senographe Essential applications
and patient data.
3-1 Image annotations

• The equipment includes a function IMAGE ANNOTATIONS, which allows the physician to store
information about the patient.
• Note that a European Directive regarding the protection of peoples’ personal and private data, the
availability of such data and the extent of its circulation by data management systems, requests the
users of computerized files (radiologists, physicians and so on) not to store data related to, among
other things:
- race,
- philosophical opinions,
- religious opinions,
- political opinions.
4 De-Installation and Recycling requirements

Machines or accessories at end-of-life
The elimination of machines and accessories must be in accordance with national regulations for
waste processing.
All materials and components that could pose a risk to the environment must be removed from the
end-of-life machines and accessories (examples: dry and wet cell batteries, transformer oil, etc.).
Please consult your local GE Representative before discarding these products.

5 Labeling
5-1 Meaning of symbols
Type B equipment
Alternating current
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed
of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an
authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.
Name and address of the manufacturer
Date of manufacture
Medical device catalogue number
Medical device serial number
Consult instructions for use
Caution
-or-
Attention, consult accompanying documents
Symbol indicating that the Instructions for Use are supplied in electronic form
Small focal spot
Large focal spot
Radiation filtration

5-2 Glossary
This glossary describes non-translated parts of the labels.
Label wording Description/Translation Location

Country specific regulatory System label on the generator
BR AR MX
registration information cabinet
CN CO EG
Momentary rating Momentary rating System label on the generator

cabinet
Long time rating Long time rating System label on the generator
cabinet
PHASE Phase System label on the generator
cabinet
①②③④⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪⑫ Korean specific regulatory Korean label on the generator
information cabinet
Made in France Made in France Korean label on the generator
cabinet
FACTORY PRESET VOLTAGE Factory preset voltage (intended for Preset voltage label on the
installation personnel only) generator cabinet
MODEL NUMBER / Model Model number Various labels
Manufactured: MMMMMMMM-YYYY Date of manufacture where Various labels
MMMMMMMM is the month and
YYYY is the year. The date is
identical to the one provided after
the symbol described in section 5-
1.
COMPLIES WITH DHHS RADIATION Statement of compliance with US Various labels
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21 radiation regulation
CFR SUBCHAPTER J
Made for GE Medical Systems SCS Made for GE Medical Systems SCS Collimator supplier label under the
Buc, France Buc, France X-ray tube
By GE Hualun Medical Systems By GE Hualun Medical Systems
Co.Ltd Beijing, China Co.Ltd Beijing, China
Description: Component description Collimator supplier label under the
Eclipse Sirius Collimator Eclipse Sirius Collimator X-ray tube
Serial NO Serial number Collimator supplier label under the
X-ray tube
Input rating Input rating Collimator supplier label under the
X-ray tube
Manufactured by: Manufactured by: RadShield label (if present,
For: For: depending on the version installed)
Pb EQUIVALENCE THICKNESS: xx Lead equivalence thickness RadShield label (if present,
mm AT xx kV XX mm at XX kV depending on the version installed)
Eq Pb XX mm Lead equivalence XX mm RadShield label (if present,
depending on the version installed)

Label wording Description/Translation Location

This sticker is in the low right side This sticker is in the low right side RadShield label (if present,
angle and must be legible from the angle and must be legible from the depending on the version installed)
operator side. operator side.
User publication CD User publication CD User publication CD artwork
Class A Class A User publication CD artwork
Revision Revision User publication CD artwork
All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved User publication CD artwork

6 Control of Pollution caused by Electronic Information Products (EIP’s)

6-1 Explanation of Pollution Control Label
This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess of the limits
established by the Chinese standard SJ/T11363-2006 Requirements for Concentration
Limits for Certain Hazardous Substances in Electronic Information Products. The number in
the symbol is the Environment-Friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the period
during which the toxic or hazardous substances or elements contained in electronic
information products will not leak or mutate under normal operating conditions so that the
use of such electronic information products will not result in any severe environmental
pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period is "Year".
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be operated normally according to
the instructions and environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and periodic
maintenance schedules specified in Product Maintenance Procedures shall be followed
strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an EFUP value less than the
product. Periodic replacement of those consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP
shall be done in accordance with the Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, and must be collected
separately and handled properly after decommissioning.

6-2 Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances
Component Name Hazardous substances name
Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE
System Cabinet X O O O X X
Operator Console X O O O X X
Gantry X O O X X X
X-Ray Detector X X X X X X
X-Ray Tube O O O O O O
X-Ray Tube Housing X O O X O O
Collimator X X X X X X
Biopsy Positioner O O O O O O
Computers X X X X X X
UPS O O O O O O
Cable Set O O O O X O
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
• Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication.
• Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to achieve its intended
clinical uses, and/or to provide better protection to human beings and/or to environment, due to
lack of reasonably (economically or technically) available substitutes.

Safety recommendations
Chapter 3 Safety recommendations
1 Introduction
It is considered mandatory that examinations can be performed regularly, without problems. All aspects
of mammographic exams, and especially safety, must be optimized to ensure effective diagnosis and
allow the development of screening programs.
Safety precautions and recommendations for the avoidance of potential hazards, and against misuse,
are given throughout this document. They must be made known to, and be practised by, all Operators of
the Senographe Essential.
Review the on-screen Operator Manual from time to time and be sure that you are familiar with all
aspects of use of the equipment, and especially those affecting safety.
Important safety precautions and recommendations are brought to your attention in this chapter.
Stop all examinations and call your GE Service Representative immediately if you believe that the
equipment is not operating correctly.
2 Potential adverse effects

The following is a list of potential hazards that apply to mammography and are also applicable to digital
mammography using the Senographe Essential:
• Injuries
- Excessive breast compression,
- Skin irritation, abrasions, or puncture wounds,
- Infection.
• Irradiation
- Excessive X-ray exposure.
• Electrocution
- Electric shock.
3 System configuration
WARNING
No modifications to system hardware or software (e.g. loading application programs onto the
system computer) shall be made without prior approval from GE. GE cannot guarantee the
integrity of the system if this recommendation is not followed.
safety.fm Page no. 29 Chapter 3

4 Before starting an examination

4-1 Check the integrity of the system covers
WARNING
Check the integrity of the covers on the Arm, Column and Control Station. If any of these covers
is damaged or detached, contact your GE Service Representative to have it replaced.
4-2 Check the paddle, the Bucky and the magnification stands
CAUTION
Check that the paddle and the Bucky or the magnification stand are clean and free from dust.
Impurities on the surface of the paddle, Bucky or magnification stands may generate artifacts in
captured images.
CAUTION
Check that the Bucky or the magnification stand does not have any scratches or has not
sustained any damage to its surface. Damage or scratches to the surface of the Bucky or the
magnification stand may generate artifacts in captured images.
CAUTION
Check that the compression paddle and the Bucky or magnification stand are well inserted in
their supports, and are being used as recommended. If the Bucky is used, be sure that it is locked
(not only inserted).
WARNING
Only accessories and components supplied by or specifically recommended by GE may be used
with the system. GE cannot guarantee the integrity of the system if this recommendation is not
followed.
WARNING
Only Senographe Essential system compression paddles may be used with the system. Use of
other paddles may adversely affect image quality by causing inaccurate measurements of breast
thickness (if another paddle is used, exposure is forbidden in all modes except in manual mode).
CAUTION
All accessories must be checked regularly to ensure that their surfaces do not contain cracks and
that they have no sharp edges or corners that might cut, pinch, or otherwise hurt a patient.
4-3 TechInsight option
WARNING
Only specific models and configurations of PC and monitors are suitable for use with the
TechInsight option. For compatible configurations, please see the latest product data sheet for
this system, which may be obtained from your local GE sales representative.
Chapter 3 Page no. 30 safety.fm

4-4 Damaged equipment
WARNING
If equipment is damaged or fails, have it repaired immediately by authorized GE service
personnel, even if the damage or failure does not affect the functions you normally use. The
damage or failure can result in a potentially serious patient safety hazard under other
circumstances.
4-5 Damage to the Digital Detector
CAUTION
The digital detector contains thallium doped cesium iodide, a substance which requires special
precautions for handling and recycling. If the protective casing of the digital detector sustains
damage, please consult your GE Service Representative.
CAUTION
If the digital detector casing is punctured, the detector must be removed by authorized GE
service personnel wearing protective gloves and dust masks.
5 Operator protection against radiation

CAUTION
To avoid excessive exposure to radiation, Operators must remain behind suitable radiation
shields whenever X-ray exposures are made.
To avoid excessive exposure to radiation, Operators must remain behind suitable radiation shields
whenever X-ray exposures are made.
It is mandatory that the X-ray Console used to control X-ray exposures be permanently mounted behind
a radiation shield, in such a way that it can only be used by an Operator in the protected area. The
Acquisition Workstation (AWS) controls are used during exposures, then they also must be installed in
the protected area.
These requirements are met by the Senographe Essential Control Station, which includes a radiation
shield (700 mm/25 inches wide; at least 0.3 mm lead equivalence shielding) and provides a suitable
mounting position for the X-ray Console in the protected area. Other radiation shields are available if
required to meet the requirements of local regulations or hospital working practices.

6 When performing an examination

CAUTION
It is essential to maintain both visual and voice contact with the patient throughout the
examination.
6-1 Check the patient

Before beginning the mammogram, observe the following points:
1. Make a visual assessment of the breast area before positioning the patient, and note anything
which may affect or be adversely affected by the correct positioning of the breast for the
mammogram, for example, warts, scarring, or skin which is not intact. In patients with large
breasts, perspiration under the breast can cause the skin to soften, and become paper-thin.
To position the breast properly for a mammogram in the Cranio-Caudal (CC) position, it is
mandatory that the breast be lifted away from the chest wall and gently pulled forward, in order to
visualize the maximum amount of breast tissue. Such pulling and lifting is necessary for correct
positioning, but can cause damaged skin to tear slightly, and may cause bleeding.
If any condition exists which may cause unusual discomfort or tearing of the skin, the patient
should be told of the importance of correct positioning, and should be warned in advance of the
possibility that minor tearing and /or slight bleeding might occur.
2. Use suitable techniques for the positioning of patients with breast implants.
6-2 AOP mode

The Senographe Essential provides an AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) operating mode.
This mode is designed to optimize image quality for the examination of breasts with a compressed
thickness between 10 mm (0.4 inch) and 80 mm (3.15 inches).
However, there are some types of examination for which manual selection of parameters may be more
suitable. These are discussed in the Operator Manual, Chapter 10 Examination steering guide.
Using the STD mode should satisfy most needs. However, if a higher priority is given to the dose
delivered to the patient, the DOSE mode may be selected instead. If a higher priority is given to the
contrast to noise ratio in images, the CNT mode may be selected. It is important to understand that any
improvement in contrast to noise ratio is done at the cost of an increase in glandular dose and vice
versa; a decrease in glandular dose will yield a reduction in contrast to noise ratio. For more information
on evaluating which priority to select, consult with your interpreting physician or radiologist.
6-3 Residual images

Repeated exposures made with a high contrast object in the digital detector area may lead to the
creation of a ghost image, caused by an excessive difference of residual charges between cells of the
detector. The time taken for this ghost image to disappear depends upon the magnitude of the residual
charges.
This effect can occur during checks to measure the X-ray field which use a dosimeter ionization chamber
in the beam. To avoid it, use one of the following solutions:
• Reduce the contrast of the object by including it in a field protected by an X-ray attenuator of
adequate thickness.
• Use the internal dose measurement facility.
• Protect the digital detector by means of a 3 mm steel plate for the duration of the measurements.

6-4 Breast support temperature

• It is normal that the front part of the breast support is warm to the touch, as it contains electronic
components that generate heat. However, the temperature is never high enough to be harmful.
To ensure that examinations are carried out under optimum conditions, any unusual rise in
temperature causes a warning message to be displayed on the AWS LCD monitor, forbidding
examinations. Any further rise causes the detector system to be automatically shut down.
• GE can take no responsibility for injury to the patient caused by the use of heating or warming
devices external to the system.
6-5 Moveable components

The equipment includes a number of moveable components.
CAUTION
Users must be instructed to monitor all movements, and to take all due care and precautions
when moving any part of the equipment in the vicinity of themselves or other persons.
To ensure safe operation at all times, the compression system is fitted with a magnetic braking
mechanism, which prevents the compression paddle from falling in the event of power loss. If power loss
does occur while a patient is under compression, the compression force remains unchanged. Disengage
the patient by raising the paddle gently, using the manual compression knobs. See section
4 Compression carriage and Paddle holder assembly on page 44.
To minimize potential injury to the patient in decompression mode, the upward movement of the
compression paddle is stopped if a downward force greater than 3 daN is applied.
6-6 Emergency stop and shutdown

• Emergency stop switches are provided on both sides of the column, easily accessible to the
Operator. See the illustration in section 1 Gantry components on page 39.
Push either of these switches to immediately stop all positioner movement. Any compression
which may have been applied to the patient remains unchanged; the patient must be released by
using the manual compression knobs. See illustration in section 4 Compression carriage and
Paddle holder assembly on page 44.
After use of one of these switches, the Operator must turn power off and on (from the X-ray
Console) to restore normal use of the system.
• If an emergency arises which requires complete removal of power from all parts of the system,
the mains isolator switch that supplies power to the system from the hospital supply must be
switched off. Find out where this isolator is located and how to operate it.
Note that all image and patient information being processed at the time of cutting power will be
lost, and that power for the environmental control of the Digital Detector will be cut (this may entail
a delay before the system can be brought back into use).

7 Storage of acquired images

Images acquired during examinations are stored on an internal disk system for preliminary assessment,
before permanent archiving or printing to film. The system is designed to avoid all foreseeable problems
during the acquisition and storage operations. Precautions include continuous checks on all components
and the provision of a battery-backed Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), to allow correct processing of
images to be completed before shutdown in the event of a power failure.
Certain conditions may cause a loss in the ability of the system to acquire high quality images or a risk
that images might not be correctly saved (for example, if the UPS batteries are not sufficiently charged to
ensure correct shutdown). If one of these conditions arises, a warning message appears on the AWS
monitor and/or the X-ray Console. A list of possible error messages, with explanations and suggested
actions, is given in Chapter 26 Operator messages.
You should note the following recommendations:
• Always follow the correct system shutdown procedure as described in Chapter 12 Startup and
shutdown.
• In spite of the presence of the UPS, it is not advisable to switch off power while an image is being
processed and stored.
• If defects or failures of the disk system are observed, call your GE Service Representative. It may
be possible to recover information on the disk system if the damage is not too severe.
7-1 Image recovery

In case of ADS crash or power failure during an exam or if some images do not get declared (for
example after an Error occured in Medical Application !):
1. Restart the Browser or reboot the system.
2. Reopen the Medical Application (opening an exam in review mode for instance).
Image recovery is then launched automatically.
3. Close the exam to go back to the Browser.
Once this has been done, the images will be declared properly in the Browser.
8 Archiving
CAUTION
The digital technology used by the Control Station provides the ability to transfer acquired images
between workstations, and to store them on a hard disk system. However, it is not intended or
approved for use as an archiving device. To prevent any loss of data, make sure to periodically
archive your data using a device intended for reliable long-term storage.
WARNING
Do NOT perform REPROCESSING of images acquired with the Senographe Essential, using
another acquisition system, as this may result in artifacts due to incompatibility.

Product presentation
Chapter 4 Product presentation
1 Overview
1-1 Senographe DS and Essential family
Senographe DS and Essential models belong to the family of Digital Mammography Systems from GE.
They have been designed to perform Screening examinations as well as Diagnostic Views (including
Spot compression, Magnified and/or Coned views). These systems eliminate the need for film cassettes,
and take advantage of digital technology, including on-screen image display, Networking, Filming, and
Archiving.
The raw and processed images are available on the AWS LCD monitor within a few seconds after the
exposure.
The Senographe Essential is a large Field Of View (FOV) system while the Senographe DS is a normal
FOV system. It has a larger detector which allows the examination of large breasts. The position of a
small breast can be de-centered on the left side or the right side by adjusting the sliding paddles.
1-2 Indications for use

The Senographe Essential system is intended to be used in the same clinical applications as traditional
mammographic film/screen systems. It generates digital mammographic images which can be used for
screening and diagnosis of breast cancer.
intro.fm Page no. 35 Chapter 4

2 System components
Control Station Generator Cabinet Gantry
(see Chapter 7 Control Station) (see Chapter 9 Generator Cabinet) (see Chapter 5 Gantry)
X-ray Console
(see Chapter 8
X-Ray
Console)
System options (not shown): See section 3 System options on page 37
Chapter 4 Page no. 36 intro.fm

3 System options
System options available are listed below. See your GE Representative for more information on
accessories and options.
3-1 PVi image processing

This optional processing is particularly adapted to images presenting white or dark local areas. As it is
not available in all countries, see your GE Representative for more information on this option.
3-2 Networking
The Senographe Essential is DICOM (standard for Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine)
compliant, allowing it to be connected in a network with other compliant devices for the exchange of
images. Networking allows transmission of images acquired with the Senographe Essential system
to other DICOM-compatible review stations, using the “Network Push” function of the Browser. In
some cases, detailed evaluations will be needed for the implementation of customized connections.
3-3 Review workstation
Example shown: Seno Advantage 2 review

workstation.
- Short-term archiving.
- Images transfer to printer and network.
Provides interchange media archiving on CD-R, and
DICOM archiving.
WARNING
For softcopy diagnostic interpretation, images must be reviewed on an approved Digital Imaging
and Communications in Medicine (DICOM)-compatible review workstation with screens whose
resolution are at least 5 Mpixels each.
3-3-1 Use of review workstations
WARNING
Images acquired on the Senographe Essential digital mammography acquisition system are
larger than the images produced by the Senographe DS. Displaying or printing large images on a
review workstation without the ability to handle them correctly may result in errors in object size
evaluation and measurement.
GE review stations (IDI Mammo Workstation and Seno Advantage 2_03.1.5 or later) can be used for
review.
When using other GE Workstations (RWS and Seno Advantage 1.x) to display or print large Senographe
Essential images users may misjudge the size of objects in the image, because the zoom factor may be
different from one and is not annotated on the displayed or printed images.
Before using a non-GE review workstation, the user should contact the workstation provider and verify
that the product is capable of correctly displaying and printing images generated by Senographe
Essential with a zoom factor of one or alternately displaying the zoom factor on the image.
intro.fm Page no. 37 Chapter 4

If you send images from the Senographe Essential by network or by CD for review on remote
workstations, please advise your correspondents of this requirement.
3-4 Mass archiving system

When this option is installed and connected to the Senographe Essential, acquired images can be
sent to the mass archiving device for permanent storage, either automatically or on request. A list of
all patients ever imaged on the Senographe Essential system can be kept on the mass archiving
device, making future retrievals fast and easy.
3-5 Printer
To provide “hard copies” of images, the Senographe Essential system can be connected to a high
resolution DICOM MG compatible printer for film printing.
WARNING
Only images produced by GE-recommended printers can be used for final interpretation of
examinations. For compatible printers see the latest product data sheet for this system, which
may be obtained from your local GE sales representative.
3-6 TechInsight
TechInsight is a mechanical adaptation which integrates the additional PC and monitor components
required by the Mammography Documentation Station with the acquisition console.
WARNING
The Acquisition Workstation and the Mammography Documentation Station are not linked for
synchronisation of displayed data. It is possible to view the data of one patient on the
Mammography Documentation Station, while the data of a different patient is displayed on the
Acquisition Workstation.
See the TechInsight Operator Manual for further details.
WARNING
Only specific models and configurations of PC and monitors are suitable for use with the
TechInsight option. For compatible configurations, please see the latest product data sheet for
this system, which may be obtained from your local GE sales representative.
4 Senographe Essential accessories

Accessories delivered with the Senographe Essential and available as options are listed in Chapter 6
Accessories.
Chapter 4 Page no. 38 intro.fm

Gantry
Chapter 5 Gantry
1 Gantry components
The main components of the gantry are shown below:
Gantry Arm
Emergency stop See 2 Gantry Arm on page 40
button Main components:
- X-Ray tube head
- Compression Carriage and Paddle
holder
- Image Receptor
Column
Gantry readout
(see 6 Gantry readout on page 50)
Footswitches
(see 7 Footswitches on page 50)
• Emergency stop buttons: There are two emergency stop buttons, one on each side of the Column.
Press one of these buttons to immediately stop all Gantry movement. After performing a Gantry
emergency stop, you can reactivate movement on the Gantry by performing a Gantry reset (See
section Gantry reset on page 90).
• Column: The Gantry Column is securely fixed to the floor. It supports the Arm and allows it be moved
vertically.
gantry.fm Page no. 39 Chapter 5

Gantry
2 Gantry Arm
X-ray tube head
See 3 X-Ray tube head on page 41
Arm movement control buttons

See 3 X-Ray tube head on page 41
Compression Carriage and Paddle holder

See 4 Compression carriage and Paddle
holder assembly on page 44
Handle Interchangeable compression paddle

See 4-1 Interchangeable compression
paddles on page 44
Image Receptor
See 5 Image Receptor on page 46
Hand rest
Magnification stand (Not shown)

See 5-3 Installing the breast support (Bucky
or Magnification stand) on page 48
• Handle: The patient’s hand may be positioned on the handle as required, for greater comfort and to
optimize access to the breast, especially for lateral and oblique views.
• Compression Arm: The Compression Arm is connected to the Column by a rotating shaft; it can be
rotated through the range of +185 degrees to -165 degrees.
Chapter 5 Page no. 40 gantry.fm

Gantry
3 X-Ray tube head

The X-ray tube head contains the X-ray tube, the Collimator diaphragm, and the centering light. It
provides the Collimator light and field of view (FOV) control buttons, as well as the Arm movement
control buttons. The Face protection shield accessory can be fitted to it. See illustration below:
X-ray tube head side view X-ray tube head rear view
Arm movement control

buttons
See 3-1 Arm movement
control buttons on page 41
Collimator light and field of view (FOV) control buttons

See 3-2 Collimator light and FOV control buttons on page 43
Face protection shield

See 3-3 Face protection shield on page 43
2D Cross-hair device
See 3-4 2D Cross-hair device on page 43
3-1 Arm movement control buttons

Four sets of five buttons are provided, one on each side of the X-ray tube head and one on each side
at the base of the handle. They are all used in exactly the same way.
Arm elevation
Left of Arm control buttons Right of Arm
1 4 5 5 4 1
2 2
3 3
Arm rotation
control buttons

Gantry
3-1-1 Arm rotation control buttons (references 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the illustration)

3-1-1-1 Movement to any required position
• Rotation control buttons; reference 4. Use either right or left button 4 to rotate the Arm in the direction
of the arrow.
Press the top or bottom of the button gently to rotate the Arm in the direction indicated by the arrow at
low speed.
Press harder to increase the speed of movement to the chosen preset value of 20 or 40 degree/
second. Release the button to stop the movement.
3-1-1-2 Movement to memorized positions
Memorized positions
Automatic rotation can be used for movement to one of three memorized positions as shown in the table
below.
For automatic rotation to a memorized position (“last-used” or default)
Memorized Use button Last-used position Default position
position name reference (overrides Default position) (applied at each power-up + each time
a new exam is started)
CC 2 N/A 0°
+Oblique 1 Set when an exposure is made at an Operator choice, between +30° and
angle between +11° and +79°. +75°
-Oblique 3 Set when an exposure is made at an Operator choice, between -30° and
angle between -11° and -79°. -75°.
When a new position is memorized, the same numeric value is set for positive and negative movement.
For example, if an exposure is made which sets the last-used +Oblique angle to +50°, the last-used -
Oblique angle is set to -50°. The new position is only memorized for the current exam. On power-up and
each time a new exam is started, the oblique position is set to the DEFAULT value.
How to reach a memorized position
• To rotate the Arm to one of these positions, press the button shown for more than one second and
then release it.
• An automatic rotation movement started by pressing one of these buttons can be stopped at any time
by pressing any of the buttons located on the Arm or one of the footswitches on the floor, or by
touching the compression paddle.
How to choose a Default position value
• The two factory settings for the Default values are ± 45°.
• To change these values, use the X-ray Console set-up menus; see section 4 Configuring the X-ray
Console set-up menus on page 86.
3-1-2 Arm elevation control buttons (reference 5 in the illustration)
• Use one of these buttons to move the Arm up or down. Press the top or bottom of the button lightly to
move the Arm up or down at low speed. Press harder to increase the speed of movement. Release
the button to stop the movement.
Note:
If the Arm touches an obstacle during downward movement, the movement is stopped.

Gantry
3-2 Collimator light and FOV control buttons

The field of view (FOV) is the area that is irradiated by X-rays during an exposure. Prior to exposure, its
size (e.g. 9 x 9, 13 x18, 24 x 31, etc.) and position (left, right, centered) are set by pressing the Collimator
light and FOV control buttons as described below.
X-ray tube head rear view
FOV position button
FOV size button
3-2-1 Turning on the Collimator light

When the Collimator light is off, turn it on by pressing either the FOV size button or the FOV position
button. The light turns off automatically after approximately 45 seconds.
3-2-2 Setting FOV size
Press the FOV size button to change the field of view (FOV) to the next available size.
For information on display of FOV size on the Gantry readout and in screen and film annotations, see
section 1 Setting FOV size on page 109.
3-2-3 Setting FOV position
Press the FOV position button (this button has raised dots to help you recognize it without looking at it) to
move the collimated FOV to the next available position: left, center, or right. For more information, see
2 Setting FOV position on page 111.
3-3 Face protection shield
Face protection shield is mounted on the front of the X-ray tube and tube housing assembly by sliding it
from the front onto the interface plate rails. It can be easily installed and removed.
CAUTION
The face protection shield must be removed when using a magnification stand.
The face protection shield must always be mounted by sliding it onto the rails from the the front.
The rails at the back are for mounting the 2D Cross-hair device.
To make sure the face protection shield is securely installed, push it toward the rear of the tube
head until you hear the click and feel the mechanical stop.
3-4 2D Cross-hair device
CAUTION
The 2D Cross-hair device must never be inserted in place of the face protection shield. It must be
inserted below the X-ray tube head covers from the REAR onto the rails of the mounting plate.
The optional 2D Cross-hair device is mounted by sliding it onto the rails from the rear.

Gantry
4 Compression carriage and Paddle holder assembly

Compression
Paddle unlocking button
Carriage and Paddle
See 4-1-4 Removing a
holder assembly
paddle on page 46
Manual compression Paddles

adjustment knobs See 4-1 Interchangeable
compression paddles on
page 44
Arm movement
control buttons
See 3-1 Arm
movement control
buttons on page 41
Interchangeable compression paddles are fitted to this assembly as required. The assembly can be
moved up and down on the Arm to apply the desired amount of compression to the patient’s breast.
Compression may be controlled by using manual adjustment knobs (see below) or by using footswitches
placed on the floor to control motorized movement of the carriage. See section 7 Footswitches on
page 50.
• Manual compression and decompression adjustment knobs:
The knobs located on each side of the paddle holder allow manual adjustment of the compression.
Turn the top of the knob towards the patient to increase compression, away from the patient to
decrease compression.
4-1 Interchangeable compression paddles

4-1-1 List of compression paddles
• A list of available compression paddles and their characteristics is given in Chapter 6 Accessories.
WARNING
Only the paddles and accessories recommended for your Senographe model should be used
with this equipment. Failure to heed this warning may cause unexpected results and possible
data loss.
! Notice:
Paddles must be handled carefully. Foreign matter, such as dust, dirt, or small objects, can enter
their mechanisms and cause damage to the paddles. Physical shock and vibration can also
damage paddles. Therefore, when paddles are not in use, they must be stored in an accessories
cart where they are protected from dust, dirt, small foreign objects, physical shock and vibration.
! Notice:
To avoid any risk of premature failure, it is recommended that the 2D large localization paddle and
all spot paddles (sliding square, sliding round, and 2D spot localization) be used with a
compression force no greater than 20 daN.

Gantry
4-1-2 Installing a paddle

! Notice:
To prevent damage to the paddle and paddle holder, before installing a compression paddle, make
sure that:
- the Arm elevation is at a comfortable height,
- the paddle interface plate is correctly aligned with the paddle holder rails.
• To install a paddle on the paddle holder, slide it onto the paddle holder rails. It will automatically lock
when the position for clinical use is reached (central position for a non-sliding paddle, or one of the
three positions for a sliding paddle - see section 4-1-3 Modifying the position of a sliding paddle with
pre-defined positions on page 45). The paddle is locked to the paddle holder and cannot be moved
from this position unless the Operator activates the paddle unlocking button. See section 4-1-
4 Removing a paddle on page 46.
CAUTION
Before any use of a compression paddle, make sure that the paddle is correctly locked. Check
that the paddle locking button on the compression carriage is in the locked position, and check by
hand that the paddle cannot be moved. For sliding paddles, take care not to activate the sliding
release button while making this check.
The type of paddle inserted in the paddle holder is recognized by the system and displayed on the
Gantry readout. Only paddles designed and validated for use with the Senographe Essential system
must be used; the characteristics of these paddles are known by the system and are taken into
account, together with the known characteristics of breast tissue, when calculating parameters such
as compression force and breast thickness.
Note:
When a paddle is used to apply compression to a rigid phantom (for example, Plexiglas), the
thickness indicated on the Gantry readout is not correct because of the different characteristics of
the material as compared to breast tissue.
4-1-3 Modifying the position of a sliding paddle with pre-defined positions
Sliding paddles can be off-centered to the left or to the right of the Detector center in order to compress
all the needed tissue in angulated views.
A sliding paddle has the following three defined positions:
- Centered
- Off-centered to the left (by 3.85 cm)
- Off-centered to the right (by 3.85 cm)
Sliding paddles are locked on the Paddle holder in the same way as non-sliding paddles, so the
Operator can easily distinguish the following actions:
- Sliding action using one of the paddle sliding release buttons (available only on sliding paddles):
See next paragraph.
- Unlocking action using the paddle unlocking button (available for all paddles):
See section 4-1-4 Removing a paddle on page 46.

Gantry
• To allow the paddle to slide along the paddle holder, press one of the Paddle release buttons
two paddle release buttons (the two buttons function identically, use the
one that is easier to access). Release the button as soon as the paddle
has slid from its initial position. When a pre-defined position is reached,
the sliding paddle automatically locks itself into the new position.
Compression and exposure are disabled if the sliding paddle is not in
one of the three defined positions.
4-1-4 Removing a paddle

A paddle can be unlocked and removed regardless of its position on the paddle holder. If the paddle is
removed from one of the defined positions (e.g. off-centered to the left), at the next insertion it will be
positioned in the same position (e.g. off-centered to the left).
• To remove a paddle from the paddle holder: Paddle unlocking button
- Turn clockwise the paddle unlocking button located on the paddle
holder cover until it points to the unlocked padlock symbol on the
paddle holder.
- Release the button and slide the paddle away. The button then
returns to its initial position.
- In the case of sliding paddles, the activation of the sliding release
button is not needed to remove the paddle.
5 Image Receptor
The Image Receptor includes the Digital Detector and Breast Supports.
Breast supports include:
- Bucky,
- Magnification stand,
- Stereotactic Positioner.
CAUTION
The digital detector is a very fragile and highly sensitive piece of equipment. The Bucky and the
Mag Stand serve as a protective cover of the digital receptor. Take care never to leave the
detector without the Bucky or the Mag Stand installed. To avoid damage to the digital detector:
- Do not place small objects (needles, pens, etc.) on its surface.
- Take special care not to drop anything on the detector.
Dropping an object onto the detector may damage it and can lead to expensive repair work or
replacement of the digital detector. Damage caused by these sorts of accidents are not covered by the
GE warranty.

Gantry
5-1 Bucky for contact views

Bucky - Top view Bucky - Bottom view
Bucky
CAUTION
The surface of the Bucky is fragile. Scratching the surface of the Bucky may provoke artifacts in
captured images. When handling the Bucky, take special care to protect the surface from shocks
and objects that may induce a scratch.
5-2 Magnification stand for magnification views

Magnification stand - Top view Magnification stand - Bottom view
CAUTION
The surface of the magnification stand is fragile. Scratching the surface of the Magnification
Stand may provoke artifacts in captured images. When handling the Magnification Stand, take
special care to protect the surface from shocks and objects that may induce a scratch.

Gantry
5-3 Installing the breast support (Bucky or Magnification stand)

Note:
Installation of the breast support is easiest when Arm angle is at 0° and with the Operator directly
facing the Image Detector. If necessary, adjust Arm elevation to improve comfort and ease of
breast support installation.
• Carefully align the breast support (Bucky or Magnification stand)
with the rails and slide the breast support onto the rails.
CAUTION
Carefully align the breast support cover to be parallel to the

detector. Inserting it at an angle may scratch the carbon top
side of the detector and/or damage the breast support's
electrical connectors.
• Press on the front side of the breast support until motor noise is
heard, indicating the start of the locking phase. Motor noise is
heard during the entire locking phase.
• Once locking begins, the Operator can release pressure on the front side: locking takes place
automatically.
CAUTION
Before locking the breast support into place, check that there is no small object that could
become wedged between the breast support and the white image receptor cover. This could
degrade image quality.

Gantry
CAUTION
To avoid any risk of pinching fingers during installation of a breast support (Bucky or
Magnification stand), slide the breast support onto the rails and push it rearward by pressing on
its front side until the locking motor starts. During the automatic locking phase, keep hands away
from the moving part (breast support) and white covers of the Image Detector. In an emergency
to stop the automatic locking or unlocking of the breast support, just press briefly on either of the
breast support unlocking buttons. The breast support can at this point be unlocked by the usual
procedure (simultaneously press both breast support unlocking buttons).
See section 5-4 Removing the breast support on page 49).
• For magnification views, remove the Bucky and install a Magnification stand. The Magnification stand
is installed in the same way as the Bucky. Insert it until it reaches a position where motorized locking
occurs. The Magnification stand is then automatically locked.
Magnification factors are defined in the middle of a 4 cm thick breast, i.e., 2 cm above the
Magnification stand. Two Magnification stands are available: one for a magnification factor of 1.5 and
one for 1.8.
• The Image Detector is placed as required for correct patient positioning by moving the Arm. The
height of the Bucky breast support surface from the floor is adjustable between about 650 mm
(26 inches) and 1500 mm (59.1 inches) with the Arm in the 0° position.
Note:
Surfaces which contact the breast (for example the Bucky, Magnification stand, and compression
paddles) must always be kept clean. See Chapter 27 Planned Maintenance.
5-4 Removing the breast support

• Simultaneously press on both breast support unlocking buttons located
under the white covers of the Image Detector. It is only necessary to press
the two buttons briefly in order to start the unlocking phase of the breast
support. Motor noise is heard during the entire unlocking phase. Do not
pull on the breast support: unlocking takes place automatically. When the
motorized unlocking movement stops (after about three seconds),
manually remove the breast support by sliding it along the rails.
CAUTION
Breast support unlocking
buttons
The side of the breast support that is the last to slide free of the rails is
heavier than the other side. Be sure to be prepared for this extra
weight by grasping the breast support at a sufficient distance from the front edge before removing
it. The Operator must use both hands during the entire breast support removal procedure. The
careful attention of the Operator during the entire breast support removal procedure is necessary.
! Notice:
Do not remove the breast support by force.
! Notice:
Breast supports (Buckies and Magnification stands) must be handled carefully. Foreign matter,
such as dust, dirt, or small objects, can enter their mechanisms and result in damage to the breast
supports. Physical shock and vibration can also damage breast supports. Therefore, when breast
supports are not in use, they must be stored in an accessories cart where they are protected from
dust, dirt, small foreign objects, physical shock and vibration.

Gantry
5-5 Stereotactic Positioner

Please refer to the Senographe Essential Stereotaxy Operator Manual.
6 Gantry readout
• The Gantry readout display normally shows the following
information (left to right):
- Compressed breast thickness in mm.
- Angle of rotation.
- Compression force in daN.
- Magnification factor that appears for a few seconds in a
specific Operator message at the moment when the
Magnification stand is installed.
• It may also be used for warning messages and (in
stereotaxy applications) angulation information.
7 Footswitches
• The footswitches are used to apply/release
compression and increase/decrease the Arm
height. There are two sets of footswitches placed
on the floor at the base of the Gantry, one on the
left and one on the right.

Accessories
Chapter 6 Accessories
Accessories are classified into six categories. See the corresponding sections:
• Section 1 Compression paddles on page 51
• Section 2 Breast supports on page 54
• Section 3 2D Localization accessories on page 55
• Section 4 Patient positioning accessories on page 55
• Section 5 Patient identification accessories on page 56
• Section 6 Image quality control accessories on page 56
The following accessories are optional or basic depending on country. Please contact your GE Sales
Representative.
1 Compression paddles
1-1 Paddles characteristics
A large variety of paddles may be used with Senographe Essential.
- They may be parallel or flexible,
- They may be sliding with pre-defined positions, sliding without pre-defined positions, or non-sliding at
all,
- Their shape may be rectangular, round or square,
- They may be used for compression or localization,
- They may be used in contact view or magnification view.
1-2 Flexible paddles specifications

The flexible compression paddles are designed to provide uniform compression from chest wall to
nipple, and from medial to lateral (or superior to inferior, depending on arm rotation angle), by tilting with
respect to the Bucky as compression is applied. They are self-adjusting, and can be used in place of
parallel paddles. The flexible paddles are not intended to remain flat and parallel to the breast support
surface when compression is applied. They do, however, comply with MQSA Quality Mammography
Standard 21 CFR 900.12(b)(8)(ii)(C) regarding equipment intended by the manufacturer’s design to not
be flat and parallel to the breast support surface.
To ensure continued performance of a flexible compression paddle according to its specifications, the
tests described in Senographe Essential Quality Control Manual , must be performed at least once every
year or when a loss in performance is suspected.
accessories.fm Page no. 51 Chapter 6

Accessories
1-3 Compression paddle list

Name Illustration Context Basic or Optional Physical/Functional
Characteristics description
24 x 31 paddle Contact view Contact GE Sales See section 4-
Parallel non-sliding Representative 1 Interchangeable
compression
paddles on page 44
in Chapter 5
Gantry.
Flexible 24 x 31 paddle Contact view Contact GE Sales

Flexible non-sliding Representative
Sliding 19 x 23 paddle Contact view Contact GE Sales

Parallel sliding with Representative
predefined positions
Flexible sliding 19 x 23 Contact view Contact GE Sales See section 4-

paddle Representative 1 Interchangeable
Flexible sliding with compression
predefined positions paddles on page 44
in Chapter 5
Gantry.
Sliding square spot Contact view Contact GE Sales

paddle Representative
Parallel sliding with
Chapter 6 Page no. 52 accessories.fm

Accessories

Sliding round spot Contact view Contact GE Sales
paddle Representative
Parallel sliding with
Round spot Magnification Contact GE Sales

magnification paddle view Representative
Square Spot Magnification Contact GE Sales See section 4-

Magnification Paddle view Representative 1 Interchangeable
compression
paddles on page 44
in Chapter 5
Gantry.
19 x 23 magnification Magnification Contact GE Sales

paddle view Representative

Accessories
2 Breast supports
2-1 Types
Breast supports include:
• Bucky,
• Magnification Stand.
2-2 Breast support list

Bucky with markings Contact view Contact GE Sales See section 5-
Representative 3 Installing the
breast support
(Bucky or
Magnification
stand) on page 48
in Chapter 5
Gantry.
1.5 Magnification stand Magnification Contact GE Sales

view Representative
1.8 Magnification stand Magnification Contact GE Sales

view Representative

Accessories
3 2D Localization accessories
2D Cross-hair device Localization Optional See section 1 Face
for biopsy shield and 2D
Cross-hair device
on page 199
2D Large localization Localization Optional See section 4-

paddle for biopsy 1 Interchangeable
compression
paddles on page 44
in Chapter 5
Gantry.
2D Spot localization Localization Optional

paddle for biopsy
4 Patient positioning accessories

Hydraulic chair Not shown Patient Optional
positioning
Optional Patient Basic See section 1 Face
Face protection shield positioning shield and 2D
Contact view Cross-hair device
only on page 199

Accessories
5 Patient identification accessories

Bar code scanner for Patient Optional See section 3 Bar
AWS identification code scanner
option on page 147
in Chapter 18
Worklist
6 Image quality control accessories

ACR Mammo phantom Quality Optional Senographe
Control Test Essential QC
Manual
IQST phantom Quality Basic

Control Test
IQST phantom Quality Basic

magnification adaptor Control Test
Acrylic plates Quality Contact GE Sales

Control Test Representative

Accessories

Calibration plates (Flat Quality Basic Senographe
Field test object) Control Test Essential QC
Manual
Dosimeter support Quality Basic

Control Test

Accessories

Control Station
Chapter 7 Control Station
1 Overview
1-1 Control Station functions
The Control Station provides the following AWS (Acquisition WorkStation) functions:
• Image acquisition from the Digital Detector
• Image display and manipulation
• Management of patient information and Examination database
• Image transfer to other Workstations using the DICOM standard
• Filming of images (on optional printer)
• Archiving images (on optional mass archiving system)
• Saving of images on recordable CD-ROMs
Senographe Essential applications are based upon a graphical, multi-window, mouse- or trackball-driven
interface.
Images, lists, menus, and control panels are displayed within graphical windows on the AWS LCD
monitor. Selections are made using on-screen buttons, menus and control panels, etc., by pointing and
clicking with the mouse or optional trackball. See sections 2-1-2 Windows on page 60 and 2-1-3 On-
screen tools on page 60).
1-2 Control Station hardware
AWS LCD monitor
Radiation screen See 2-1 AWS LCD Monitor on page 60
Mouse or optional trackball

See 2-2 Pointing devices on page 62
AWS Operator
interface
X-ray Console
See Chapter 8 X-Ray Console
AWS keyboard
See 2-3 Keyboard on page 63
AWS Cabinet
Bar code scanner

See 3 Bar code scanner on
page 63
The Control Station comprises:

• A radiation screen mounted on the AWS Cabinet. The X-ray Console may be mounted on top of the
cabinet.
• A Operator interface, called AWS, which includes a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) monitor,
alphanumeric keyboard, and pointing device (mouse or optional trackball) for Operator interaction
with the Control Station’s ADS computer.
aws.fm Page no. 59 Chapter 7

Control Station
• A computer unit (with internal hard disks for system software and image storage), housed inside the
AWS Cabinet.
2 AWS Operator interface

2-1 AWS LCD Monitor
2-1-1 Recommendations
WARNING
The AWS LCD monitor must NOT be used for final interpretation of examinations.
Note:
The AWS LCD monitor must be used in a suitably dark environment when reviewing a digital
image. The maximum recommended ambient light level is 100 lux.
CAUTION
To reposition the monitor (to move it forward, backwards or rotate around the lead glass shield)
only use the handle to avoid being pinched.
2-1-2 Windows
There are several types of windows that will be encountered as you use the Senographe Essential AWS.
The most important ones are:
• The Browser. This is the main window used to manage the database, start the Review application,
etc. See Chapter 17 Browser.
• The Worklist is used to display a list of scheduled operations. From this window you can start image
acquisition and review operations. See Chapter 18 Worklist.
• The Viewer is used by the acquisition and review applications to display and process the images.
See Chapter 20 Viewer
These main windows give access to other windows, such as the Medical Procedure Card window, the
Annotations window in the Viewer, various Operator selection windows, etc.
Also, small message windows concerning procedures in progress appear on the AWS LCD monitor as
you perform various functions. Some of these disappear on their own, others remain on the screen and
the application remains blocked until the message is acknowledged by clicking on OK or Cancel.
Note:
If the system does not respond because two or more windows are open one on top of another, it
is possible to recover by holding down the ALT key and pressing the TAB key on the keyboard
(several times if needed) to access hidden windows.
2-1-3 On-screen tools
2-1-3-1 Cursor
The cursor is the on-screen symbol, usually an arrow, which you maneuver across the screen
using the trackball or mouse, to point to menus, lists, images, and windows.
The cursor changes shape or orientation to indicate a change in function. Some examples:
• When you point to a menu item and click with the left mouse button to open a pull-down
menu, the cursor changes to an arrow pointing to the right, to indicate you can now make a
selection in the pull-down menu.
Chapter 7 Page no. 60 aws.fm

Control Station
• The cursor changes into a watchface if a function that you have selected takes more than a moment
to implement; no further function selection is available until the procedure is completed.
Once the procedure is finished, the cursor returns to an arrow shape, indicating that the
Workstation (AWS) is ready to accept further input.
2-1-3-2 On-screen buttons
Most windows contain on-screen buttons (areas in the form of buttons, containing explanatory graphics
or text labels) to activate specific functions. These functions are described in detail elsewhere in this
manual. Such buttons are sometimes referred to as icons.
To select (or activate) a button, click it.
When a button's label is shaded grey rather than white, it means that the button's function
is currently not available.
2-1-3-3 Menus
Reprocess
Certain buttons activate specific functions directly. Others activate drop-down menus that
allow you a choice of functions.
To select (or activate) a function in a menu, move the cursor onto the menu item and click. The
Workstation (AWS) carries out your command, and the menu disappears.
When a menu item is shaded grey rather than white, it means that the function is currently not available.
2-1-3-4 Scroll Bar
A scroll bar is an on-screen tool that you use to page through data that cannot be fully displayed at once
on the screen or in a particular window, such as lists of patients or exams in the Browser.
• To move through the data controlled by the scroll bar (images, items in a Browser list, etc.), you can
place the cursor on the vertical rectangular bar within the scroll bar.
Then, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the cursor up or down to move
backward or forward through the list. The vertical bar within the scroll bar shows you where
you are within the list as compared to the list as a whole.
Release the mouse button when the desired data are displayed.
• If you want to move through the data one item at a time, place the cursor on either the
upper or lower arrow and click the left mouse button. Each click moves you up or down by
one item of the data.
• If you want to move through the data one page at a time, place the cursor either above or
below the vertical bar and click the left mouse button. Each click now moves you up or
down by one page of data.

Control Station
A scroll bar becomes active only if the display capacity of the list is exceeded. Otherwise, the vertical bar
fills the full height of the scroll bar, and clicking on the vertical bar or the arrows has no effect.
2-2 Pointing devices

2-2-1 Introduction
A mouse or trackball pointing device is supplied, which allows you to select and interact with items
displayed on the AWS LCD monitor.
The mouse is supplied as standard, the trackball is available as an option. Both are hand-operated
devices which move the cursor (an on-screen arrow or other symbol; see section 2-1-3-1 Cursor on
page 60) across the AWS LCD monitor screen. For instance, moving the mouse to the right, or rolling
the trackball to the right, causes the cursor to move to the right, and so on. Both devices include buttons
for selection and interaction with on-screen objects.
2-2-2 Mouse and trackball buttons
Throughout this manual instructions for use of buttons on the pointing device refer to them as if they
were mouse buttons, named left button, middle button, and right button. This is done because most
users are familiar with the use of a mouse, and because trackballs can be configured in different ways.
The illustrations and table below show the correspondence between mouse buttons and trackball
buttons:
Mouse buttons Trackball buttons
Mouse button Equivalent Left Middle Right
button 4
trackball buttons
button 5
Left button button 3 button 4 button 6
button 1
Right button button 1 button 6 button 2
Middle button button 2 button 5 button 3
2-2-3 Using the pointing device

With the cursor positioned on the appropriate object on screen, the left button is used to select a window,
an on-screen button, or an item in a menu list.
The middle and right buttons are used for specific operations, described in the appropriate sections of
this manual.
• “Click” means to press and release a button without moving the cursor.
• “Double-click” means to click a button twice in rapid succession.
• “Press and drag” means to move an item across the screen. With the cursor on the item, press and
hold the appropriate button while moving the mouse or rolling the trackball, “dragging” the selected
item.
• “Drag and drop” means to drag an item and “drop” it in a new location. Drag the item as described
above (“press and drag”), then drop it in the required position by releasing the button. Specific “drag
and drop” operations are described in more detail in the appropriate sections of this manual.
• Important: "Clicking the mouse button", “pressing a button”, “selecting a menu item”, etc. in this
manual always refer to using the left mouse button, unless the middle or right mouse button is
specifically mentioned.

Control Station
2-3 Keyboard
Back Space
Tab
Caps
Lock
Control Shift Return Delete
Depending on the keyboard delivered with your system, the Caps Lock and Control keys may be
inverted.
The keyboard is used for entering text at on-screen prompts and alphanumeric data in data entry fields.
Use the Delete or Back Space key to erase entered text or data. Reference will be made to the other
keys, Shift, Caps Lock, Tab and Return in various parts of this manual.
3 Bar code scanner

A bar code scanner can be supplied as an option to allow rapid and accurate entry of patient data in
hospitals. See section 3 Bar code scanner option on page 147 in Chapter 18 Worklist for more
information.

Control Station

X-Ray Console
Chapter 8 X-Ray Console
1 Overview
• The console is normally mounted on the AWS Cabinet, behind the radiation screen.
• The X-ray Console:
- Controls power On/Off facilities. It is used to power up the complete system, and to power down
the Gantry and Generator.
- Provides control buttons and status indicators which enable the Operator to prepare, execute,
and monitor X-ray exposures.
- Provides LCD panels that display operating parameters and messages from the system.
Labels
See 2 Labels on page 65
Plugs for connection of

remote handswitch and
cable to generator
Buttons, switches and displays.

See 3 Buttons, switches and displays on page 66
Optional remote handswitch (usually
mounted on the side of the AWS Cabinet)
2 Labels
The symbol on the X-ray Console indicates that you must have read and understood the Operator
Manual before taking any action.
The symbol on the X-ray Console indicates that this is X-ray equipment. It is dangerous to both
patient and Operator unless measures of protection are strictly observed.
console.fm Page no. 65 Chapter 8

X-Ray Console
3 Buttons, switches and displays

The illustration and table below identify the various console buttons, switches and displays.
Information on each numbered item is given in the following pages.
1 2 3 4 11 18 16 19
5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 17
3-1 Buttons, Switches and Displays summary

1 Gantry/Generator power on switch I 12 kV selection knob
2 Gantry/Generator power off switch O 13 mAs selection knob
3 Set-up button 14 AOP and manual mode selection button
4 Readout display 15 Exposure enable lamp
5 Focal Spot selection button 16 Exposure indicator lamp
6 Focal track selection button 17 Exposure disable lamp
7 Filter selection button 18 Centering light ON button
8 Breast laterality - Left button 19 Exposure interrupt button (with indicator lamp)
9 Breast laterality - Right button 20 Prep button with indicator lamp
10 Special views selection button 21 Exposure button
11 kV and mAs readout display 22 Compression release button
3-2 Buttons, Switches and Displays detailed description

1. Gantry/Generator power on switch I
• Press this button to power on the Gantry and Generator and other system components; the
indicator lamp lights and the system startup procedure begins. The X-ray Console displays the
last configuration used.
2. Gantry/Generator power off switch O
Press this button to power off the Gantry and Generator; the indicator lamp lights.
Note:
For more information on startup and shutdown procedures, see Chapter 12 Startup and shutdown.
Chapter 8 Page no. 66 console.fm

X-Ray Console
3. Set-up button
• Press this button to access X-ray Console set-up functions; language selection, MEDICAL menu,
and view selection for recumbent patients. See section 4 X-ray Console set-up menus on
page 70 for more information.
4. Readout display
The readout displays two lines of up to 40 characters.
• The upper line displays information, safety, and error messages.
• The lower line displays the selected parameters: focal spot, focal track, filter, breast Laterality,
View names, presence of magnification view, and arm rotation angle.
5. Focal Spot selection button
• Small and large focal spots (0.1 or 0.3 respectively) are selected automatically according to the
presence or the absence of a magnification stand. Do not try to override this selection as the
exposure will be forbidden. The readout indicates the size of the selected focal spot.
Focal Spot automatic selection
Magnification Stand not installed 0.3
Magnification Stand installed 0.1
6. Focal track selection button

• Press this button to switch between the two anode tracks; molybdenum (Mo) and rhodium (Rh).
- In manual mode, press the button to select the anode track.
The readout indicates the track selected. See section 2 Manual mode on page 115.
- In AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) mode, selection is automatic, and pressing
the button has no effect.
7. Filter selection button
• Press this button to switch between the two filters, molybdenum (Mo) and rhodium (Rh).
- In manual mode, press the button to select the filter.
The readout indicates the filter selected. See section 2 Manual mode on page 115.
Certain filter/anode track pairs are inhibited, according to the selected kV value. The system
automatically selects an authorized filter and displays the selection. For suggested filter/
anode track pairs, see table 1 Suggested manual techniques - No implant on page 116.
- In AOP mode, filter selection is automatic, and pressing this button has no effect.
8. Breast Laterality - Left button
• When acquiring an image, press this button to indicate that a LEFT breast is being imaged.
9. Breast Laterality - Right button
• When acquiring an image, press this button to indicate that a RIGHT breast is being imaged.
Note:
Selection of breast Laterality (left or right breast) is mandatory. If Laterality is not selected by the
Operator, the exposure command is disabled.

X-Ray Console
10. Special views selection button

View names are normally determined automatically; the View names used are based on the
American College of Radiology (ACR) View name convention; see section 1 Introduction on
page 103 for more information. This button is used to modify the View name if a special view is used.
• Automatic view selection
After the Operator selects breast Laterality, the system determines and displays the correct View
name according to the Gantry Arm angle. View names selected automatically are: RCC, LCC,
RMLO, LMLO, LSIO, RSIO, LML, RML, LLM, RLM, LLMO, RLMO, LFB, RFB.
If magnification is in use, the letter M is automatically added to the View name after the Laterality
letter (e.g., LMCC for a magnification view on the left breast in the CC position).
See section 4 Core View name - selected automatically on page 105.
• Special view selection
When a special view is used which does not correspond to the automatic view selection, press
the Special Views selection button as often as required until the desired View name appears. See
section 5 Core View name modified manually (standing or sitting patients) on page 106.
• Recumbent patients
The automatic and special view selection procedure applies only to standing or sitting patients.
View names for recumbent patients (patients unable to stand or sit for the mammogram) are
selected using the Recumbent patients menu as described in section 6 Core View names for
recumbent patients on page 106.
11. kV and mAs readout display
During routine exams (i.e. Non-Stereotaxy exams):
• In manual mode the readout displays the kV and mAs values selected by the Operator.
• When an AOP mode is selected, the kV readout displays the code of the selected mode: CNT
(Contrast), STD (Standard), or DOSE. The mAs readout displays AUTO.
• At end of exposure, the kV readout displays two types of information:
- the first letter (C, S or D) of the code of the selected mode (CNT, STD, or DOSE),
- the kV value selected and used during the exposure, and followed by the letter A (i.e. AOP);
the mAs readout displays the mAs value used during the exposure.
During Stereotaxy exams:
• In manual mode the readout displays the kV and mAs values selected by the Operator.
• When AUTO mode (i.e. AOP mode for Stereotaxy exam) is selected, the kV readout displays the
code of the selected mode: AUTO (Automatic). The mAs readout displays AUTO.
• At end of exposure, the kV readout displays two types of information:
- the letter X corresponding to AUTO mode,
- the kV value selected and used during the exposure, and followed by the letter A (i.e. AOP);
the mAs readout displays the mAs value used during the exposure.

X-Ray Console
12. kV selection knob

• In manual mode, turn the kV selection knob to select the required kV value; the displayed value
changes as the knob is turned. Available values are 22 kV through 49 kV in steps of 1 kV. There
is no mechanical stop; you can continue to turn the KV selection knob past the minimum or
maximum value (22 kV or 49 kV), but the displayed value no longer changes. See section
2 Manual mode on page 115.
• In AOP mode, turning the KV selection knob has no effect.
13. mAs selection knob
• In manual mode, turn the mAs selection knob to select the required mAs value; the displayed
value changes as the knob is turned. Available values are 4 mAs through 500 mAs, but some
parameter selections may change these limits (e.g. the X-ray Console can display as high as
600 mAs whereas the exposure is automatically limited to 500 mAs). There is no mechanical
stop; you can continue to turn the mAs selection knob past the minimum or maximum value, but
the displayed value no longer changes. See section 2 Manual mode on page 115.
• In AOP mode, turning the mAs selection knob has no effect.
14. AOP and manual mode selection button
During routine exams (i.e. Non-Stereotaxy exams):
Press the mode selection button to step through the four possible image capture modes; three AOP
modes and one manual mode.
• Three AOP modes are available, according to the priority required:
- CNT (Contrast)
Priority is given to optimum subject contrast, while minimizing patient dose.
- STD (Standard)
Gives a compromise between good contrast and dose reduction.
- DOSE (Dose)
Priority is given to dose reduction, with acceptable image quality.
• When AOP mode is selected, the selected priority code appears on the kV readout and AUTO is
displayed on the mAs readout. When the exposure is complete, the initial letter of the code
selected appears on the kV readout.
• Manual mode is used to allow manual selection of kV and mAs values.
During Stereotaxy exams:
Press the mode selection button to step through the two possible image capture modes; one AOP
mode (AUTO mode) and one manual mode.
• AUTO mode is the AOP mode used by the system for Stereotaxy exams.
• When AOP mode is selected, AUTO appears on the kV and mAs readout. When the exposure is
complete, the letter X appears on the kV readout.
• Manual mode is used to allow manual selection of kV and mAs values.
15. Exposure enable lamp
• When this lamp is lit, exposure is enabled.
16. Exposure indicator lamp
• This lamp is lit from the start to the end of an exposure.
• A buzzer sounds at the end of exposure.

X-Ray Console
17. Exposure disable lamp

• When this lamp is lit, exposure is disabled. Follow the instructions displayed on the left hand
section of the console readout.
18. Centering light ON button
• Press this button to switch on the centering light for 45 seconds. The button lights.
Note that the centering light does not function when an exposure is initialized.
19. Exposure interrupt button (with indicator lamp)
• Press this button to terminate the current exposure if a problem occurs. The lamp is illuminated
and a buzzer sounds.
Press the button again to stop the buzzer and reset the system.
20. Prep button with indicator lamp
• Press this button to prepare the exposure (anode rotation).
When the Exposure Enable lamp lights, exposure can be triggered.
Note:
If the Prep button is released before the Exposure Enable lamp is lit, the preparation is cancelled;
preparation stops one second after release.
21. Exposure button
• Press and hold this button while the Exposure Enable lamp is lit to make an exposure. To stop the
exposure immediately, release the Exposure button.
A buzzer sounds at the end of exposure.
Note:
In AOP mode, and following preparation (anode rotation), exposure is made in two stages:
- An absorption measurement exposure (the "pre-exposure"), to allow selection of the optimum
kV, focal track, and filter combination for the chosen priority. These parameters are then set
automatically. Maximum pre-exposure time is 70 ms (large focal spot) or 130 ms (small focal
spot).
- An exposure during which image acquisition is made.
• The Operator must maintain pressure on the Exposure button until the buzzer stops to obtain
proper exposure.
22. Compression release button
• Press this button to release compression. The compression paddle automatically moves up to the
pre-programmed auto-decompression height.
Note:
If auto-decompression is selected in the MEDICAL menu, compression is released automatically
at the end of the exposure.
4 X-ray Console set-up menus

See section 4 Configuring the X-ray Console set-up menus on page 86 of Chapter 11 Initial training and
set-up.

Generator Cabinet
Chapter 9 Generator Cabinet
1 Presentation
The Generator Cabinet contains power switching equipment, the generator and system management
electronics, and a chiller (connected to the Digital Detector for control of the detector environment).
Generator Cabinet Power control panel
Power "ON" Power "OFF"
These switches control power to the AWS Cabinet and to the UPS.
They are provided for service and emergency use; they should not be
used in normal operation
• The Generator Cabinet is mounted on wheels for ease of installation; it is not recommended that it be
moved in normal operation.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation slots.
• The power control panel visible on the cabinet controls power to the Control Station and to the UPS.
It is normally used only for service operations.
generator.fm Page no. 71 Chapter 9

Generator Cabinet
Chapter 9 Page no. 72 generator.fm

Examination steering guide
Chapter 10 Examination steering guide

1 Prerequisites on page 74
2 Power up and startup the system on page 74
3 Receive the patient on page 74
4 Prepare examination on page 75
4-1 Patient exam selection on page 75
4-1-1 Patient exam selection with Worklist on page 75
4-1-2 Patient exam selection without Worklist on page 75
4-2 Check the selection of Medical Application preferences on page 75
4-3 Start examination on page 75
5 Examination: acquire the 1st image on page 76
5-1 Preparing the equipment on page 76
5-1-1 Selecting magnification mode (contact view versus magnification view) on page 76
5-1-2 Selecting the proper breast supports (Mag. stand and compression paddle) on page 76
5-1-3 Mounting the breast supports on page 76
5-1-4 Setting Arm rotation on page 76
5-1-5 Setting FOV size and FOV position on page 76
5-2 Check the patient on page 76
5-3 Positioning the patient on page 77
5-4 Use of markers on page 77
5-4-1 Digital markers: Laterality and View name on page 77
5-4-2 Manual markers on page 77
5-4-2-1 Use of markers in general on page 77
5-4-2-2 Use of markers in AOP mode on page 77
5-5 Compression on page 79
5-5-1 Apply compression on page 79
5-5-2 Thickness display on page 80
5-5-3 Dose display on page 80
5-6 Image Acquisition on page 81
5-6-1 Things to do immediately before taking the exposure on page 81
5-6-1-1 Select breast Laterality on page 81
5-6-1-2 Check View name on page 81
5-6-1-3 Choosing exposure mode (AOP or manual) on page 81
5-6-2 Suggested exposure sequence on page 82
5-6-3 Make the exposure on page 82
5-6-4 Raw and processed images on page 82
5-6-5 Modifying contrast (window width) and brightness (window level) on page 82
5-6-6 Check View names and correct if needed on page 82
6 Acquire other images on page 82
7 Working with images resulting from an examination on page 83
7-1 Quality Check (with or without RRA) on page 83
7-2 Preparation of images for CAD & review on page 83
exam_steer.fm Page no. 73 Chapter 10

7-3 Transfer images on page 83

7-4 Print images on page 83
8 Store images on page 84
9 Power off system on page 84
This chapter explains the procedure for examinations using the Senographe Essential, from the
preparatory tasks to be performed on the equipment (selection of exposure mode, configuration, etc.)
through patient positioning, with notes on the exposure sequence and image processing.
1 Prerequisites
1-1 Training
See section 2 Training program on page 85.
1-2 User (Operator) account

See section 3 User account on page 85.
1-3 Configure the system

See section 4 Configuring the X-ray Console set-up menus on page 86.
2 Power up and startup the system

See section 1 Startup procedure on page 89.
3 Receive the patient

Women undergoing a mammography examination often feel apprehensive because of the examination
and the ensuing diagnosis.
To reassure the patient, receive her in a warm room and provide a simple but precise explanation of the
procedure. Pay particular attention to breast compression, which can cause discomfort, but is mandatory
in order to produce a high quality exam and ensure reliable diagnosis.
It is best to examine the breast during the first half of the menstrual cycle (1st through 14th day). The
breasts are less tender and less painful before ovulation.
Examination of the breast requires the patient to disrobe from the waist up. An appropriate cover should
be provided during the waiting period.
Chapter 10 Page no. 74 exam_steer.fm

4 Prepare examination
CAUTION
It is essential to maintain both visual and voice contact with the patient throughout the
examination.
4-1 Patient exam selection
WARNING
Before starting the examination, always review the complete patient information you have
entered or selected to make sure it actually is that of the current patient. Failure to do so can
result in data mismatch.
4-1-1 Patient exam selection with Worklist
Exposures can only be made after patient/exam selection from the Worklist (see Chapter 18 Worklist).
4-1-2 Patient exam selection without Worklist
If the examination has not been scheduled and included in the Worklist, a new entry can be made, but
image acquisition is not permitted until basic patient information has been recorded in the system.
4-2 Check the selection of Medical Application preferences

The options provided for Medical Application preferences are usually set to suit the majority of
exposures made at your facility, but you may wish to change them for a particular patient or type of
examination.
See section 8-3 Medical Application preferences on page 129 for more information.
4-3 Start examination

After selection of the patient for whom you want to start acquiring images, click the Start Exam button to
continue with the image acquisition. The Viewer window (see Chapter 20 Viewer) opens.
Note:
If the following message appears in a dialog box:
"Current processing is for QC purposes only. For Clinical application, click OK and enable Fine
View in Medical Application preferences, Image Process. tab.".
It means that Fine View is currently set to Disable, which is the configuration for Quality Check
tests only.
Click OK and go to Tools menu/Medical Application preferences to set Fine View to Enable. See
section 8-3-9 Image Process. on page 135.

5 Examination: acquire the 1st image

5-1 Preparing the equipment
5-1-1 Selecting magnification mode (contact view versus magnification view)
Configure the system for the required magnification mode (1x for contact view, 1.5x or 1.8x for
magnification view).
5-1-2 Selecting the proper breast supports (Mag. stand and compression paddle)
The digital detector incorporates a removable grid (Bucky). For magnification views (1.5x or 1.8x)
remove the Bucky and replace it by the appropriate Magnification stand. See section 5 Image Receptor
on page 46 in Chapter 5 Gantry.
5-1-3 Mounting the breast supports
Always make sure that the magnification stand is correctly locked in place before starting an exam.
Install the appropriate compression paddle. To accommodate different breast sizes, there are different
sized paddles available. Check that the type of paddle is correctly recognized by the system and
displayed on the Gantry readout. Paddles not designed for use with the system may give incorrect
results. See section 4 Compression carriage and Paddle holder assembly on page 44 in Chapter 5
Gantry.
The result of breast support mounting is that the following are automatically selected by the system:
• Magnification mode (contact view or magnification view),
• Focal spot size (large for contact view, small for magnification view).
5-1-4 Setting Arm rotation
Rotate the Arm to the appropriate angle for the desired view. See section 3-2 Collimator light and FOV
control buttons on page 43 in Chapter 5 Gantry.
5-1-5 Setting FOV size and FOV position
The initial FOV size and position depend on magnification mode (contact view or magnification view),
Arm angle and paddle type inserted. This means that most of the time, the initial FOV size and position
are convenient for the examination being prepared. For more information, or to change FOV size or
position, see section 3-2 Collimator light and FOV control buttons on page 43 in Chapter 5 Gantry and
Chapter 15 Setting FOV size and position.
5-2 Check the patient

See section 6-1 Check the patient on page 32 of Chapter 3 Safety recommendations.

5-3 Positioning the patient

It is important to relax the patient. Any contraction of the pectoral muscles or muscles of the Arm can
cause an error in positioning.
Elevate the breast and center it on the image receptor over all its surface:
1. Remove folds from the skin.
2. Bring out the nipple and position it in profile when possible. Do not sacrifice breast tissue for nipple
profile.
3. Bring out the inframammary angle for applicable views.
4. Use the centering light to check the field size, and ensure there are no artifacts obscuring the breast
(e.g. hair, earrings, etc.).
Note:
Using a sliding paddle facilitates the positioning of a small/medium-breasted patient, especially in
angulated views.
5-4 Use of markers

5-4-1 Digital markers: Laterality and View name
• Check the Laterality and Core View name selection. See Chapter 14 View name selection if
necessary.
5-4-2 Manual markers
5-4-2-1 Use of markers in general
When the patient is positioned for a Cleavage view (CV), external markers must be used to assist in
determining Laterality when viewing the image. Place a Right (R) or Left (L) marker in the lateral aspect
of the breast of interest, or place markers on the lateral side of each breast. Markers must be placed
outside of the 230 mm x 190 mm ROI (Region Of Interest) used by AOP for 24 x 31 image size, or the
160 mm x 140 mm ROI used by AOP for 19 x 23 image size.
5-4-2-2 Use of markers in AOP mode
The algorithm used in AOP mode searches for the most dense part of the breast, and uses this as a
reference in its calculations. It is therefore important to avoid the presence of dense objects in the area
used by the algorithm.
When using AOP mode, do not place large markers such as View name markers in the area used by the
AOP algorithm. They may be used anywhere outside this area. Small markers with an area no greater
than 2 mm2, such as BB markers up to 1.6 mm in diameter, may be used as required (a BB marker is a
small metal pellet which can be placed on the bucky as a marker which can help with anatomical
orientation on the radiographic image).
CAUTION
Do not use any radio-opaque markers other than BB markers within the AOP ROI. BB markers
having diameters up to and including 1.6 mm diameter may be used. Larger markers will affect
the calculation of tissue density, which may lead to a degraded image.

In contact views using AOP and 24 x 31 image size No large markers in shaded area
acquisition, the region used to identify the densest part of the
breast has an area of 230 mm by 190 mm, is adjacent to the 230 mm
chest wall side, and is centered on the image receptor (the
shaded area in the diagram). AOP ROI
190 mm
In contact views using AOP and 19 X 23 image acquisition,

No large markers in shaded area
the region used to identify the densest part of the breast has
an area of 160 mm by 140 mm, is adjacent to the chest wall 160 mm
side, and is centered on the image receptor (the shaded area
in the diagram). AOP ROI
140 mm

5-5 Compression
Note:
A warning message to the operator is displayed on the X-ray Console if there is lack of
compression (< 3 daN) when the operator wants to expose.
If the compression force is less than 3 daN, exposure in AOP mode is forbidden.
It is important to use adequate breast compression because the benefits in image quality and dose
reduction are significant:
• Compression reduces motion blurring by immobilizing the breast.
• Compression reduces geometric blurring by ensuring direct contact between the breast and the
image receptor and by spreading glandular breast tissue.
• Compression reduces scattered radiation and improves subject contrast in proportion to the
reduction in thickness of tissue irradiated.
• Compression spreads the breast laterally, giving it a uniform and reduced thickness. This reduces
exposure and consequently the mean glandular dose.
5-5-1 Apply compression
To apply compression to the breast, depress the compression footswitch. Manual adjustment can be
made using the two knobs, one located on each side of the compression paddle holder. Compress until
the breast surface is taut to the touch. Take great care with patients with mammary implants. The
compression force appears on the Gantry readout, and can be displayed on the image as an annotation
(see Chapter 20 Viewer).
The maximum compressive force available using motorized compression is 20 daN. Using manual
compression, the maximum force available is between 27 daN and 30 daN with the Arm in the 0°
position, reducing to about 20 daN at 90°. An audible warning is given when the limit has been reached.
When using the flexible compression paddle provided with your system, please use the collimator
centering light after final compression is achieved and before acquiring the image, to verify that the chest
wall side of the paddle is not flexed into the field of view.
If the paddle wall is observed in the FOV, please reposition the patient so that her chest wall does not
push the paddle wall forward. If that is not possible, switch to the standard compression paddle
corresponding to the breast size.
Note:
As a safety measure, the compression system is designed to avoid having the paddle fall in the
event of power loss. If power loss occurs during an examination, the current compression force
remains applied to the compression paddle. Disengage the patient by lifting the paddle gently
using the manual compression knobs. Do not try to lift it quickly.
Note:
Automatic decompression can be programmed to occur when the exposure is terminated, to
minimize the time spent under compression by the patient. See section 4 Configuring the X-ray
Console set-up menus on page 86 of Chapter 11 Initial training and set-up.
Note:
If automatic decompression is not enabled, decompress the patient after the exposure by pressing
the compression release button located at the lower right of the X-ray Console.
CAUTION
For 2D localization procedures, automatic decompression MUST BE DISABLED.

If the compression paddle is not present, take care to leave the space free between the bottom of the
paddle holder and the top of the image receptor assembly.

5-5-2 Thickness display

The thickness of the compressed breast is used in determining the average glandular dose (AGD), and
for AOP calculations. It appears on the Gantry readout, and can be displayed on the image as an
annotation (see Chapter 20 Viewer).
- If a valid compression paddle is detected, the actual compression thickness is displayed, whatever
the compression force (even if it is lower than the minimum force required for AOP).
- If no compression paddle is mounted or if a non valid compression paddle is detected, the
compression thickness display remains blank.
- The compression thickness taken into account by the system for exposure parameters and displayed
on the image is the value shown on the Gantry readout when the Operator presses the Prep button
on the X-ray Console .
Note:
When making an image with no compression paddle, the compressed breast thickness displayed
on the image and recorded in the image file is 45 mm. The ESE and AGD are then computed
assuming a breast thickness of 45 mm and an average breast composition.
5-5-3 Dose display
The displayed estimates of the dose to the patient are calculated as follows:
• Entrance Skin Exposure (ESE)
This quantity is computed using a calibrated model of the free-in-air air-kerma, in the plane of the
compression paddle in contact with the breast, with no back-scatter contribution from the breast. It
takes into account the attenuation of the x-ray beam by the compression paddle. This quantity is also
known as entrance air kerma (ESAK).
• Average Glandular Dose (AGD)
This conventional quantity is calculated from the above-mentioned ESE, using an interpolation of the
tables contained in "Spectral dependence of glandular tissue dose in screen-film mammography"
(Xieng Wu, Gary T. Barnes, Douglas M. Tucker, Radiology 1991; 179:143-148), and "Molybdenum
target-Rhodium filter and Rhodium target-Rhodium filter mammography" (Xieng Wu, Gary T. Barnes,
Douglas M. Tucker, Radiology 1994; 193:83-89).
Note:
When using a spot or biopsy paddle or any other compression device that does not completely
cover the breast, the entrance surface of the breast may no longer be a plane, and the distance
from focal spot to skin is not clearly defined. In addition, the ESE value is not uniform between parts
covered and not covered by the paddle, because of the attenuation caused by the paddle. In such
cases, a single accurate value cannot be provided. However, the displayed ESE value continues
to be calculated using the same convention as in the regular case.
Note:
When the ESE is not accurate because of the conditions described above, or when the breast is
partially irradiated (e.g., due to the collimation being smaller than the breast), the AGD definition
is no longer directly applicable. In such cases, the displayed AGD value should be used as an
indication only.

5-6 Image Acquisition

5-6-1 Things to do immediately before taking the exposure
When ready for the exposure, check the image information displayed:
• The Arm angle, if other than 0° (displayed on Gantry readout).
• The magnification factor (e.g., M 1.5), if magnification view is used (displayed on X-ray Console).
5-6-1-1 Select breast Laterality
Select the breast Laterality (right or left). The X-ray Console should now show:
• Laterality (R or L).
• View name (e.g., LCC, RML, LLM, etc.).
Note:
When the patient is positioned for a Cleavage view (CV), external markers must be used to assist
in determining Laterality when viewing the image. Place a Right (R) or Left (L) marker in the lateral
aspect of the breast of interest, or place markers on the lateral side of each breast. Markers must
be placed outside of the 190 mm x 230 mm ROI used by AOP. See section 5-4-2-2 Use of markers
in AOP mode on page 77.
5-6-1-2 Check View name
Check the displayed View name. For special views or recumbent patients, modify the View name
manually:
• Special Views for standing or sitting patients. See section 5 Core View name modified manually
(standing or sitting patients) on page 106 in Chapter 14 View name selection.
• View names for recumbent patients. See section 6 Core View names for recumbent patients on
page 106 in Chapter 14 View name selection.
5-6-1-3 Choosing exposure mode (AOP or manual)
AOP Mode
The AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) Mode controls radiation and allows the system to
select the main parameters.
It can be used for contact views, magnification views, or for the examination of the chest wall.
Use of AOP mode is not recommended for examinations of patients with mammary implants. Manual
mode should be used.
See section 1 AOP mode on page 113 in Chapter 16 AOP and Manual exposure modes.
Manual mode
The manual mode can be used for contact views, implant views, magnification views, for the
examination of the chest wall, and for examination of biopsy specimens and cores.
You select the following parameters:
• Focal track (Mo, Rh)
• Filter (Mo, Rh)
• kV
• mAs
Note:
By default, the system selects the large focal spot (0.3) when a contact view is selected, and the
small focal spot (0.1) when magnification view is selected. Exposures are not possible if these
settings are overridden.
See section 2 Manual mode on page 115 in Chapter 16 AOP and Manual exposure modes.

5-6-2 Suggested exposure sequence

To display the acquired images on the AWS LCD monitor in the same order as films hung in the
conventional order on a viewbox, it is suggested that patient views should be acquired in the following
order: RCC, LCC, RMLO, LMLO.
Note:
When Right/Left image pairs are acquired, it is recommended that the Right image should always
be acquired before the Left. This ensures consistent display when using the 2 x 1 view; when the
image acquired first is selected, the pair is displayed with the two chest walls in the center of the
screen.
5-6-3 Make the exposure
When all parameters are correctly chosen and the patient prepared, make the exposure using the Prep
and Exposure buttons. See section 3-2 Buttons, Switches and Displays detailed description on page 66
in Chapter 8 X-Ray Console.
5-6-4 Raw and processed images
After the exposure, the image acquired by the Digital Detector is automatically transferred to the AWS,
added to the exam and displayed on the Viewer screen as a raw image.
Processing of the image is started automatically. The processed image is added to the exam and
replaces the raw image within a few seconds.
As soon as the processed image has been transferred and displayed on the screen, the system is ready
for the next exposure. The images (first raw, then processed) from the new exposure replace the
previous image in the Viewer.
For more information on these operations, see Chapter 21 Image processing and display.
5-6-5 Modifying contrast (window width) and brightness (window level)
You can choose higher or lower contrast (window width) and brightness (window level) using the View
Control contrast and brightness settings (see section 2-2 Contrast and Brightness sliders on page 158 in
Chapter 20 Viewer).
5-6-6 Check View names and correct if needed
You can check the image for correct View name and Laterality, and change them if necessary. See
section 3-5 Change View name on page 164 in Chapter 20 Viewer.
6 Acquire other images

Repeat steps above, starting from section 5 Examination: acquire the 1st image on page 76.

7 Working with images resulting from an examination

7-1 Quality Check (with or without RRA)
You must examine each image and determine if its quality is satisfactory and qualify it, if necessary,
using the Quality Check feature. This may be done with the Repeat and Reject Analysis (RRA) function
either enabled or disabled.
See:
• Section 8-3-5 Quality Check on page 132 in section 8-3 Medical Application preferences on
page 129 of Chapter 17 Browser, that explains the aim of this feature.
• Section 4-5 Quality Check on page 168 in Chapter 20 Viewer, that explains how to use this feature.
7-2 Preparation of images for CAD & review

The Viewer allows you to display and manipulate images that have either just been acquired, or recalled
from the AWS hard disk for review.
You can display, manipulate and add text or graphic annotations (with measurements) to each image.
For specific information on the Viewer functions, see the table below:
For information on this Which allows you to Corresponding section in
Viewer function Chapter 20 Viewer
View Composition Display one, two or four images 2 View Control on page 157.
Zoom Magnify a region of a displayed image 2-1 Zoom on page 157
Contrast and Adjust window width and window level, 2-2 Contrast and Brightness sliders
Brightness respectively on page 158
2D Loc. Position and display a set of Cross-hairs on a 2-3 2D Loc. - electronic Cross-hairs
displayed image on page 158
Image Control Invert/restore image contrast and brightness and 2-4 Image control on page 159
to apply one of four auto windowing values
Annotation Level Select the required annotation level 3-2 Annotation Level on page 161
Graphics and To select and display a measurement tool, add 3-3 Graphics and measurements on
Measurements annotations, or hide or erase displayed tools and page 162
annotations
Geometric To flip or rotate the image, or return it to its 3-4 Geometric transformations on
Transformations original display page 164
7-3 Transfer images

Go to the Browser and manually push images to the designated DICOM-compatible hosts on the
network (see section 7-2 Transfer on page 125 of Chapter 17 Browser). Such hosts can be review
workstations for post-examination diagnosis.
7-4 Print images

Go to the Browser and manually push images to the designated DICOM-compatible printer on the
network (see section 7-2 Transfer on page 125 of Chapter 17 Browser).

8 Store images
Go to the Browser and manually push images to the designated DICOM-compatible hosts on the
network (see section 7-2 Transfer on page 125 of Chapter 17 Browser). Such hosts can be mass
archiving systems.
9 Power off system

According to the Auto Push parameter value set in Medical Application preferences (see section 8-3-
1 Auto Push on page 129 in Chapter 17 Browser), images need or not to be manually pushed to remote
host(s), as follows:
• Closing the Viewer with Auto Push ON. Images are automatically pushed to remote host(s) before
the system is shut down.
• Closing the Viewer with Auto Push OFF. You have to return to the Browser and manually push the
images to remote host(s) before the system is shut down.
It is recommended that the system should be shut down at the end of every working day. See section
2 System shutdown on page 90.

Initial training and set-up
Chapter 11 Initial training and set-up

Before you can undertake any examination with the Senographe Essential, you must:
• Complete a formal training program,
• Have an account created in the system,
• If you are the very first Operator of the system, set up the X-ray Console menus.
1 Operator profile
The use of the Senographe Essential requires specific technical and medical knowledge and skills. As a
minimum, operators must have acquired knowledge and skill in the areas of:
• radiation protection
• safety procedures, and
• patient safety
through approved training and professional education.
2 Training program
Before using the Senographe Essential to work with patients, it is mandatory that all users have received
adequate training. Contact your GE Representative for information on suitable training programs.
For systems subject to Mammography Quality Standards Act (MQSA) rules, the Radiologist, Interpreting
Physician, and the Medical Physicist are each required to obtain eight hours of new-modality training for
full-field digital mammography.
Additional information can be found on the Food and Drug Administration’s (FDA's) website:
http://www.fda.gov
in the Mammography pages.
3 User account
Before the system is put into service, the system administrator must set up suitable users accounts for
all "Operators" (The word "user" belongs to network access management vocabulary and is synonymous
with "Operator" used elsewhere in this manual).
Each Operator must enter their user name and password to be allowed to access the system.
See 13 User session and account management on page 91.
Starting-with-the-system.fm Page no. 85 Chapter 11

4 Configuring the X-ray Console set-up menus

X-ray Console set-up menus are accessed by using the console set-up button (button 3 in section
3 Buttons, switches and displays on page 66).
See the menu diagram in section 4-1 Access to set-up menus on page 87 for information on using the
menus.
The set-up menus allow the Operator:
• To select the language of the console display (LANGUAGE menu).
• To use the MEDICAL menu to select operating parameters, including:
Decompression:
Set END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP to YES or NO; set height of decompression.
Compression:
• Set max. compression force (highest possible setting is 20 daN for motorized compression or
30 daN for manual compression), although true maximum compression force depends on Arm
angle, see section page 5-5-1 Apply compression on page 79.
• Set speeds of compression movement (FAST or SLOW):
Normally set to FAST, i.e.:
- Down: 7 cm/second (2.76 inch/second), falling to 5 mm/second (0.2 inch/second) on breast
contact.
- Up: 9 cm/second (3.54 inch/second).
Can be set to SLOW, i.e.:
- Down: 6 cm/second (2.36 inch/second), falling to 5 mm/second (0.2 inch/second) on breast
contact.
- Up: 3 cm/second (1.18 inch/second).
- Elevation speed of movement; select FAST or SLOW.
- Rotation: set default oblique angle; set speed of rotation.
- Light duration (for stereotaxy operations only): set the default light duration.
• To select a desired View name when working with a recumbent patient (VIEW menu).
Chapter 11 Page no. 86 Starting-with-the-system.fm

4-1 Access to set-up menus

• With the X-ray Console in normal application mode, press the Setup button to enter the "menu tree"
shown below.
• To access a function, press the button below the displayed name of the function.
• To back out of a function (move "up the tree"), press the Setup button again.
VIEW MEDICAL LANGUAGE PASSWD
Function available for service only
Recumbent patient FRANC ENGL DEUTS ESPAN ITALI Next

+ - VALID
Not all available languages are displayed in this
illustration
DECOMP COMP LIFT BEEP ROTATE STEREO
DECOMP HEIGHT LIGHT
DECOMPRESSION HEIGHT 21 cm DEFAULT LIGHT DURATION 3 min

+ - VALID + - VALID
END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP

YES NO
PRESET SPEED
ROTATION SPEED SLOW

FORCE SPEED FAST SLOW
COMPRESSION SPEED FAST DEFAULT OBLIQUE ANGLE 45 deg

FAST SLOW + - VALID
MAX COMPRESSION FORCE 16 daN

+ - VALID WITH BEEP YES
YES NO
Function currently unavailable:

LIFT FOOTSWITCH SPEED SLOW selection has no effect
FAST SLOW
Starting-with-the-system.fm Page no. 87 Chapter 11

Chapter 11 Page no. 88 Starting-with-the-system.fm

Startup and shutdown
Chapter 12 Startup and shutdown
1 Startup procedure
To power up the system, press the power switch I located on the top left of the X-ray Console. Power is
applied to the whole system (Gantry, Control Station, Digital Detector, etc.); green power indicators are
lit on the Generator, the Control Station, and the AWS LCD monitor.
• A series of system initialization messages appears on the AWS screen, then the Login: prompt
appears. Type sdc (all lower case) followed by <Enter>. The AWS login screen shown below
appears after a short delay.
Illustration 1 AWS login screen
1-1 Entry for Operators

1-1-1 Definition of users
The word "user" belongs to network access management vocabulary. There are two kinds of user:
• Operator (or Radiologic Technologist) - uses the system to perform examinations via the medical
application interface
• Administrator - administers the users of the system via the administrative interface
When the system is delivered, only one Operator account is available; the user name is clinical and the
password is clinical.
1-1-2 Logging in
• Enter your user name in the Login ID field. Then enter your password as provided by the system
administrator in the Password field.
• Click the Login button.
startup.fm Page no. 89 Chapter 12

Startup and shutdown
1-2 Change password

1-2-1 Changing passwords
To change your password, contact your system administrator. They will change your password
according to 4 Changing the password for an existing user on page 95.
2 System shutdown
Note:
It is recommended that the system should be shut down at the end of every working day.
To power down the system, click the system shutdown button located towards the bottom right
of the Browser window. A confirmation message appears asking if the entire system should be shut
down. If your response is Yes, power is removed from the Senographe Essential Gantry and other
system components, while the Control Station begins a controlled shutdown, designed to safeguard
data. Complete system and UPS shut down takes about two minutes from switch-off.
Note:
The Control Station follows an automatic shutdown procedure, which protects image and patient
data. No prompts are displayed. Do not disturb this procedure by attempting to enter commands
at this time.
CAUTION
NEVER switch off at the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) except in emergency, it may cause
a loss of data.
3 Emergency stop or shutdown

• In an emergency, to stop Gantry motion: Press one of the emergency stop push-buttons; there is one
on each side of the Gantry Column. After performing a Gantry emergency stop, you can reactivate
movement on the Gantry by performing a Gantry reset (See section Gantry reset on page 90).
• In an emergency, to cut power to all system components: Switch off the main circuit breaker that
supplies power from the hospital system to the Senographe Essential system. All image and patient
information being processed at the time is lost, and the Conditioner that controls the Digital Detector
environment is switched off.
See also section 6-6 Emergency stop and shutdown on page 33 in Chapter 3 Safety recommendations.
4 Gantry reset
Certain configuration operations require the Gantry to be switched off and restarted. It is usually
desirable to reset the Gantry without disturbing the operation of the Control Station.
• To do this, switch off the Gantry and Generator by pressing the X-ray Console power switch labelled
O located on the left hand side of the X-ray Console. Switch them on again by pressing the power
switch I.
5 Generator Cabinet push-buttons

Push-buttons mounted on the Generator cabinet control power to the AWS Cabinet and to the UPS.
They are provided for service and emergency use; they should not be used in normal operation.
Chapter 12 Page no. 90 startup.fm

User session and account management
Chapter 13 User session and account management
1 Introduction
• When several users (Operators) work regularly on the same Senographe Essential, the system can
be set up to provide a separate access for each user (Operator).
• If a system has been set up for multiple users, certain tasks need to be performed regularly, such as
management of the list of authorized users, and management of the auto-logoff delay for every user.
• To ensure correct coordination, a single person (the administrator) should normally perform these
tasks.
Note:
The administrator may be the data processing manager for the site, the IT coordinator, or an
experienced user. A single user on an individual system may act as his or her own Administrator.
Note:
When the system is delivered two accounts are available:
- A user account; user name clinical, password clinical.
- An administrator account; user name admin, password admin.
• You are recommended to proceed immediately to set up new accounts with new passwords, as
described in the following sections.
• The administrator is responsible for deleting an account if it is not used.
Account-management.fm Page no. 91 Chapter 13

2 Opening an administrative session

To open an administrative session:
• Power up the system and type sdc at the login prompt and press <Enter>, or logoff from your current
session to return to the AWS login screen.
• At the AWS login screen (see section 1 Startup procedure on page 89 in Chapter 12 Startup and
shutdown) log in as admin. The factory-set default password for admin is admin.
Note:
For added security, it is strongly recommended that the designated Administrator should change
the default password at the first login.
• The user administration application starts. The available options are selected by clicking the tabs
along the top of the screen.
• By default, the tab Local User Management is selected when an administrative session is opened, as
shown below:
Ticking/un-ticking the Show protected users check box allows you to show/hide the protected system
user accounts, which cannot be removed from the system. The protected system user accounts are
highlighted in blue.
Chapter 13 Page no. 92 Account-management.fm

3 Creating and deleting users

The Senographe Essential has different types of user: clinical users, administrator users and GE
Representative users. Only clinical users can be managed by the system administrator. Clinical users
can access the medical application, perform acquisitions, and more generally have access to patient
data stored locally on the system.
• To create or delete a clinical user, first open an administrative session and display the default option
Local User Management (see section 2 Opening an administrative session on page 92).
3-1 Deleting a user
• Click the user you want to delete in the displayed list so that it appears selected in reverse video.
• Click the Remove User button at the bottom of the screen.
• From the Remove User ? question that appears at the bottom of the screen, click the Remove now
button.
• The user is deleted from the list.

3-2 Creating a user

• To create a new user, click the Add User button.
• At the bottom of the screen:
- Enter the username for the new user in the Username field.
- Enter the first name for the new user in the First Name field.
- Enter the surname for the new user in the Last Name field.
- Enter the password for the new user in the Password and Confirm password fields.
- Click the Submit button.
• The username of the newly created user appears in the user list.
• By default any user that gets created has does not belong to any group and will have StandardUser
privileges, meaning they will have access to the medical application interface when they log in. If you
want the user to access the administrative interface instead of the medical application interface, refer
to 6 Managing groups on page 98.

4 Changing the password for an existing user

The administrator can change the password of an existing user.
• First open an administrative session and display the default option Local User Management (see
section 2 Opening an administrative session on page 92).
• Click the user whose password you want to change in the displayed list so that it appears selected in
reverse video.
• Click the Change password button at the bottom of the screen.
• Enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm password fields.
• Click the Submit button.

5 Setting configuration parameters

5-1 Defining auto-logoff delay
The administrator can define an auto-logoff delay after which the AWS switches back to the login screen
if no activity has been detected on the AWS.
Note:
This delay does not apply if the AWS is in acquisition mode.
To modify the auto-logoff delay:
• Click the Configuration tab.
• Enter the value in minutes of the desired auto-logoff delay in the Inactivity Timeout (minutes) field.
• Click the Apply Configuration button, then click the Apply now to apply the changes.
5-2 Managing the Emergency Login button on the AWS login screen
The administrator can define whether or not the Emergency Login button appears on the AWS login
screen. The Emergency Login button allows users to login without specifying their credentials. By
default, the Emergency Login button is not displayed on the AWS login screen.
The Emergency Login button must only be displayed in emergency situations (e.g. when an Operator
cannot remember their credentials).
To display/hide the Emergency Login button appears on the AWS login screen:
• Tick the Display Emergency Button check box to display the Emergency Login button, or un-tick the
Display Emergency Button check box to hide the Emergency Login button.

5-3 Managing the Emergency Prompt

The Emergency Prompt is required for system use, and must remain enabled (displayed).
To ensure the Emergency Prompt is displayed:
• Ensure that the Display Emergency Prompt check box is ticked.
5-4 Managing the Enable Authorization feature

The Enable Authorization allows remote network access to the Senographe system by users. This
feature must be left to its default value of disabled.
To ensure the Enable Authorization feature is disabled:
• Ensure that the Enable Authorization check box is un-ticked.

6 Managing groups
6-1 Privileges
The Group and Permission Mapping tab of the administrative interface allows you to create groups to
which you may assign the following privileges:
• GEService
• Not functional. Do not use.
• LimitedUser
• Not functional. Do not use.
• Administrator
• This privilege can be assigned to a group.
• This privilege enables the users in this group to access the administrative interface when they log
in.
• StandardUser
• This privilege can be assigned to a group.
• This privilege is enables the users in this group to access the medical application interface when
they log in.
Administrator and StandardUser privileges should never be assigned together to the same group.
6-2 Creating groups

If required, you can create a group for either Operators (using the StandardUser privilege) or
administrative users (using the Administrator privilege).
To create a group, proceed as follows:
• Click the Group and Permission Mapping tab.

• Click the Add Group button.

• In the Group name to add field that appears, enter an appropriate name (e.g. administrators if you
are creating a group using the Administrator privilege or operators if you are creating a group using
the StandardUser privilege). The Group name to add field must contain lowercase letters only.
• Click on the newly created group from the list so that it appears in reverse video, then tick one of the
two privileges:
- Administrator - if this group is intended to be for Administrators, who will have access to
administrative interface when they log in.
- StandardUser - if this group is intended to be for Operators, who have access to the medical
application interface when they log in.
- Click the Apply group settings button, then click the Apply now button to apply the selected
privilege to that group.
6-3 Removing groups

To create a group, proceed as follows:
• Click the Group and Permission Mapping tab.
• Click on the group you intend to remove from the list, so that it appears in reverse video.
• Click on the Remove Group button, then click the Remove now button.
• The group is deleted from the list.

6-4 Assigning users to groups

Once a group exists, you can use the Local User Management tab to assign users to a group. Although
it is possible, you must never assign a user to more than one group.
To assign a user to a group, proceed as follows:
• Click the Local User Management tab.
• Click the user you want to assign a group to, so that it appears selected in reverse video.
• For the selected user tick the group you want the user to be assigned to.
• Click the Apply user settings button then click the Apply now to apply the changes.

7 Reading access control log files

Each login attempt of the Senographe Essential is logged by the AWS. The administrator can access
these log files for auditing purposes.
7-1 Viewing the log files

• To access the log files:
- First open an administrative session and display the default option Local User Management (see
- Select the Log Viewer tab to display the log file screen shown below. The screen shows a list of
all login attempts.
- Use the scroll bar to navigate the log file.


View name selection
Chapter 14 View name selection
1 Introduction
• View names are based on the ACR (American College of Radiology) standardized abbreviations for
mammography projection position codes.
• View names are normally selected automatically, according to the selected Laterality, the presence
or absence of a magnification stand, and the Gantry angle, as described in section 4 Core View
name - selected automatically on page 105.
• For views that do not correspond to the automatic selection, the Operator must select additional
information manually, as described below in sections 5 Core View name modified manually (standing
or sitting patients) on page 106 and 6 Core View names for recumbent patients on page 106.
2 Coding principle
The illustration below explains the coding principle of the View names:
View name
Laterality prefix Magnification prefix Core View name Suffix

-When needed- -When needed-
Main View name
Example 1: Right Magnified MedioLateral Oblique
R M MLO
Example 2: Left CranioCaudal with upper breast tissue Rolled Laterally
L CC RL
Viewnames.fm Page no. 103 Chapter 14

View name selection
3 View names code chart

View names used by the Senographe Essential are shown here.
Description Code Comment
Laterality - prefix selected by Operator
Right R Laterality selected by Operator
Left L Laterality selected by Operator
Magnification - prefix selected automatically
Magnification M Selected automatically if a Magnification stand is present
Core View name - selected automatically - applicable only to standing or sitting patients
CranioCaudal CC Inferior side of breast against receptor
MedioLateral Oblique MLO Inferior lateral side of breast against receptor
MedioLateral (90°) ML Lateral side of breast against receptor
LateroMedial (90°) LM Medial side of breast against receptor
LateroMedial Oblique LMO Superior medial side of breast against receptor
CaudoCranial (from below) FB Superior side of breast against receptor
Superolateral to Inferiormedial Oblique SIO Inferior medial side of breast against receptor
Core View name - selected manually - applicable only to standing or sitting patients
Exaggerated CranioCaudal XCCM As CC with patient rotated medially
Exaggerated CranioCaudal XCCL As CC with patient rotated laterally
Cleavage CV As CC but inferior side of both breasts against receptor
Axillary Tail AT As MLO; axillary breast medially and anteriorly onto receptor
Suffixes added manually - applicable only to standing or sitting patients
Implant Displaced ID Implant pushed back and flattened against chest wall
Tangential TAN Area of interest projected close to skin surface
Spot Compression S Spot compression with or without magnification
Roll Lateral RL Roll the breast slightly in lateral direction
Roll Medial RM Roll the breast slightly in medial direction
Prefixes and suffixes are used with the main View names; for example, RMMLO equals Right Magnified
MedioLateral Oblique, and LCCRL equals Left CranioCaudal with upper breast tissue Rolled Laterally.
Chapter 14 Page no. 104 Viewnames.fm

View name selection
4 Core View name - selected automatically

4-1 Principle
0°
1 - Laterality 3 - Arm rotation angle
-45°
The Operator selects the breast The system selects a View name according
Laterality, Left or Right. to the Arm angle and the Laterality. Default
2 - Magnification values for the angles used are indicated.
The system senses the presence or Arm angles are measured from the vertical
absence of a magnification stand. 0° position, with positive angles
counter-clockwise when facing the Gantry.
The sketch shows the tube at -45°.
4-2 Core View name codes

Laterality LEFT Laterality RIGHT
Tube Head to the +11°+10° -10°-11° Tube Head to the Tube Head to the +11°+10° -10°-11° Tube Head to the
Left Right Left Right
LCC RCC
LSIO LMLO RMLO RSIO
+79° -79° +79° -79°

+80° -80° +80° -80°
LLM LML RML RLM
+100° -100° +100° -100°

+101° -101° +101° -101°
LMLO RLMO
LLMO RMLO
LFB RFB
Not accessible
Not accessible
-165° -165°
+169°+170° +185° +169°+170° +185°
4-3 Example
The tube is at -45° and the selected Laterality is R, so the inferior side of the breast is against the
receptor. The system therefore selects the View name SIO, and adds the Laterality prefix R. Because
a magnification stand is present, it also adds the prefix M.
Operator selected Laterality: R

Automatically selected core View name: RMSIO
Magnification stand: Present
Tube angle: -45°

View name selection
5 Core View name modified manually (standing or sitting patients)

• If a special view is being used which does not correspond to one of the View names selected
automatically, use the Special Views selection button (button 10 in section 3 Buttons, switches and
displays on page 66) to modify the View name. Press the button as often as required until the correct
modified name appears. There are two types of modifier:
- Modifiers which are added as a suffix:
ID, TAN, RL, RM, S (e.g., RCC becomes RCCRM).
- Modifiers which replace the standard View names:
XCCL, XCCM, or CV replace CC or FB.
AT replaces MLO.
Note:
When the patient is positioned for a Cleavage view (CV), external markers must be used to assist
in determining Laterality when viewing the image. Place a Right (R) or Left (L) marker in the lateral
aspect of the breast of interest, or place markers on the lateral side of each breast. Markers must
be placed outside of the 190 mm x 230 mm (for 24 x 31 image acquisition) ROI used by AOP (see
Chapter 10 Examination steering guide).
6 Core View names for recumbent patients

For patients unable to stand or sit for the mammogram, the change of view imposed by the recumbent
position means that the automatically selected View name is not correct.
View names for recumbent patients are selected on the X-ray Console Recumbent patient menu,
accessed by using the set-up button as described in section 4 Configuring the X-ray Console set-up
menus on page 86.of Chapter 11 Initial training and set-up.
The diagram given on the following page is intended as an aid in selecting appropriate View names for
use with recumbent patients.
Each row of the diagram starts with a sketch showing the tube position for one of the main tube
angulations. It then gives, first for the Left breast, then for the Right breast:
- The View name corresponding to that angulation for a standing patient. This is the View name
which is automatically selected and displayed by the system.
- A sketch showing the path of X-rays through the breast of a recumbent patient with her head to
the left, with the corresponding View name. In the Recumbent patient menu, press the - button as
often as required until this View name appears.
- A sketch showing the path of X-rays through the breast of a recumbent patient with her head to
the right, with the corresponding View name. In the Recumbent patient menu, press the + button
as often as required until this View name appears.
In each sketch the patient is shown from the rear.

View name selection
View names displayed in parentheses, e.g. (RMLO), are not used for medical purposes.
Tube Patient
Tube Laterality Left Breast Laterality Right Breast
angulation
Automatic Recumbent view Automatic Recumbent view
View name View name
Head to Left Head to Right Head to Left Head to Right
selection selection
LCC LML LLM RCC RLM RML
LSIO LMLO LLMO RMLO RSIO (RMLO)
LLM LCC LFB RML RCC RFB
LLMO LSIO (LMLO) (RMLO) RMLO RLMO
LFB LLM LML RFB RML RLM
(LMLO) LLMO LMLO RLMO (RMLO) RSIO
LML LFB LCC RLM RFB RCC
LMLO (LMLO) LSIO RSIO RLMO RMLO

View name selection

Setting FOV size and position
Chapter 15 Setting FOV size and position
1 Setting FOV size

The first touch to the FOV size button turns the light on and the second X-ray tube head rear view
starts to change the Field Of View (FOV) to the next available size. Press FOV position button
the FOV size button repeatedly until you obtain the desired FOV size. The
FOV size appears on the Gantry readout.
Table 1 FOV sizes according to their positions
Centered FOV (cm) Off-centered FOV (cm)

24x30.7 not possible
19.2x23 19.2x23 Left
19.2x 23 Right
13x18 13x20.7 Left
13x20.7 Right FOV size button
9x9 9x19.05 Left
9x19.05 Right
To simplify the display for the Operator, only integer values are used for:
- The FOV size indicated on the Gantry readout.
- The FOV size indicated on screen and film annotations. The symbol used to indicate a FOV size in
annotations is #.
- The image size indicated on screen and film annotations. The symbol used to indicate an image size
in annotations is [ ].
The system works with two image sizes: 24 x 31 when the large field of view size is used, and 19 x 23
otherwise. The table below shows, for each actual FOV size, how the FOV size appears on the Gantry
readout and the corresponding image size in screen and film annotations.
See also illustration 2 Marking on Bucky - FOV size on page 112.
FOV.fm Page no. 109 Chapter 15

Table 2 FOV sizes on the Gantry readout / image sizes in screen and film
Actual FOV size & position Display on Gantry readout Screen and Film annotations
FOV size & position FOV size ( # ) image size ( [] )
24 x 30.7 cm 24 x 31 24 x 31 24 x 31
19.2 x 23 cm 19 x 23 19 x 23
19.2 x 23 cm left 19 x 23 Left 19 x 23
19.2 x 23 cm right 19 x 23 Right 19 x 23
13 x 18 cm 13 x 18 13 x 18
13 x 20.7 cm left 13 x 21 Left 13 x 21 19 x 23
13 x 20.7 cm right 13 x 21 Right 13 x 21
9 x 9 cm 9x9 9x9
9 x 19.05 cm left 9 x 19 Left 9 x 19
9 x 19.05 cm right 9 x 19 Right 9 x 19
13 x 23 cm 13 x 23 13 x 23
Image size and FOV size are symbolized by [ ] and #, respectively. For example, when the 13 x 18 FOV
is used, the annotation is [ ] 19 x 23 # 13 x 18.
Chapter 15 Page no. 110 FOV.fm

2 Setting FOV position

The first touch to the FOV position button turns the light on and the second starts to move the collimated
FOV to the next available position. Press the FOV position button repeatedly until you obtain the desired
FOV position. Three potential values are available: centered, left and right.
The largest FOV size (24x31cm) in contact views and all field of views in magnification views are
centered only. As a result, pressing the FOV position button in these cases has no effect.
3 Initial FOV size and position - available FOV

• The initial FOV size and position depend on magnification mode (contact view or magnification view),
arm angle and paddle type inserted. This means that most of the time, the initial FOV size and
position are convenient for the examination being prepared.
• If you are not satisfied with the initial FOV size or position, you can change either one of them by
pressing repeatedly the appropriate FOV (size or position) button. Nonetheless, some FOV sizes and
FOV positions are only available with certain paddles, as shown in the Table 4 below.
• The use of a sliding paddle facilitates the positioning of small/medium breasts in angulated views
(e.g. choose left position for an LMLO view). If you are using a sliding paddle, choose its position to
match the field of view position. To slide the paddle, see section 4-1-3 Modifying the position of a
sliding paddle with pre-defined positions on page 45 in Chapter 5 Gantry.
• Table 3 below gives the initial FOV size and position automatically taken by the system depending on
magnification mode (contact or magnification), Arm angle and compression paddle type inserted.
Table 3 Initial FOV Sizes and Positions
View mode Paddle type Arm angle Initial FOV at paddle insertion
size position
none any 24x31 centered
24x31 any 24x31 centered
2D Spot localization any 13x18 centered
2D Large localization any 19x23 centered
-10° ≤ angle ≤ +10° centered
or
+170° ≤ angle ≤ +185°
Contact (1x) Sliding 19x23 19x23
+11° ≤ angle ≤ +169° right
-165° ≤ angle ≤ -11° left
-10° ≤ angle ≤ +10° 13x18 centered
or
Sliding round spot +170° ≤ angle ≤ +185°
Sliding square spot
+11° ≤ angle ≤ +169° 13x21 right
-165° ≤ angle ≤ -11° 13x21 left
Magnification any Magnification paddle: any 13x23 centered
(1.5x or 1.8x) - Round spot magnification
- Square spot magnification
- 19x23 magnification
FOV.fm Page no. 111 Chapter 15

Table 4 FOV Sizes and Positions According Paddle Types and Positions
Mode Paddle type paddle position FOV size & position

contact all Contact non-sliding centered 24x31, 19x23, 13x18, 9x9
view paddles, except
the 24 x 31 paddle
all sliding paddles centered 24x31, 19x23, 13x18, 9x9
Left 19x23 Left, 13x21 Left, 9x19 Left
Right 19x23 Right, 13x21 Right, 9x19 Right
24x31paddle centered 24x31,
19x23, 19x23 Left, 19x23 Right,
13x18, 13x21 Left, 13x21 Right,
9x9, 9x19 Left, 9x19 Right
Mag all Magnification view centered 13x23, 13x18, 9x9
paddles
24x31 FOV size
Illustration 2 Marking on Bucky - FOV size
Chapter 15 Page no. 112 FOV.fm

AOP and Manual exposure modes
Chapter 16 AOP and Manual exposure modes
1 AOP mode
1-1 Description of AOP
When the AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) mode of operation is selected, the Senographe
takes full control of the quality and quantity of x-rays by automatically setting the exposure parameters.
The AOP mode can be used for contact views, magnification views, or for the examination of the chest
wall.
In AOP mode, all exposure parameters are automatically set by the system:
• Anode track (Mo or Rh),
• Filter (Mo or Rh),
• kVp value,
• mAs value.
At the beginning of each exposure made in AOP mode, a brief exposure is performed and a low dose
image is acquired. The radiological-equivalent thickness and density of the breast are then determined
based on the signal levels of this image in the area corresponding to the densest part of the breast.
This information is used for the automatic selection of the exposure parameters (anode track (Mo or Rh),
filter (Mo or Rh), kVp), so that the resulting X-ray beam maximizes the contrast to noise ratio (CNR) in
the image relative to the dose delivered to the breast.
Finally, the mAs value is determined to generate a target image signal level, predetermined as a function
of the breast radiological-equivalent thickness and density, the desired level of image quality and dose.
1-2 Using AOP Modes

Using the optimized beam quality determined by the AOP, it is possible to choose between three
sensitivity levels, which are referred to as AOP modes. They are called "Contrast" (CNT), "Standard"
(STD) and "Dose" (DOSE) modes.
Each of the three AOP modes corresponds to a different trade-off between contrast to noise ratio and
dose. The operator chooses one of the three AOP modes, according to the priority required:
• CNT
Contrast gives priority to image contrast to noise ratio (provides a higher CNR, and delivers a
higher dose),
• STD
Standard selects a balanced trade-off between CNR and dose,
• DOSE
Dose gives priority to dose reduction (delivers a lower dose, and provides a lower CNR).
This choice is independent of the breast density or thickness, which is automatically taken into account
by the AOP optimization.
Using the STD mode should satisfy most needs. However, if a higher priority is given to the dose
delivered to the patient, the DOSE mode may be selected instead. If a higher priority is given to the
contrast to noise ratio in images, the CNT mode may be selected. It is important to understand that any
improvement in contrast to noise ratio is done at the cost of an increase in glandular dose and vice
versa; a decrease in glandular dose will yield a reduction in contrast to noise ratio. For more information
on evaluating which priority to select, consult with your interpreting physician or radiologist.
Exposure-modes.fm Page no. 113 Chapter 16

Note:
Focal Spot selection depends on the selected configuration, that is contact or magnification
configuration. The system automatically selects the large focal spot when a standard (contact)
exam is selected, and the small focal spot when magnification is selected. Exposures are not
possible if these settings are overridden.
Note:
When a flexible paddle is used, the determination of breast density would no longer be accurate.
As a result, when using a flexible paddle, the breast density used in the determination of the
exposure parameters is automatically forced to a fixed average value. The optimization of
exposure parameters remains effective, based on the measured breast radiological-equivalent
thickness.
Use of the AOP mode is not recommended for examinations of patients with breast implants: manual
mode should be used instead. See section Implants on page 117 for further explanations.
Note:
Breast compression of at least 3 daN (30 newtons or 6.7 pounds) is essential when using AOP
mode.
In case of site specific requirements, the access to CNT mode can be restricted as described in the
Service Documentation.
1-3 AOP configuration at installation

1-3-1 Classic Tables versus Profile Tables
For each of the three AOP modes, two sets of optimized exposure parameters are available. These are
called Profile Tables and Classic Tables.
The Profile Tables have been created to provide an additional way to manage the trade-off between
image quality and patient dose by changing some of the selections of exposure parameters for particular
breast thickness and composition combinations. The changes in exposure parameter selection are
expected to affect Contrast to Noise Ratio (CNR) and Average Glandular Dose (AGD).
It is important to understand that any improvement in CNR is obtained at the cost of an increase in AGD
and vice versa; a reduction in AGD yields a diminished CNR. If the site operates in the Contrast mode,
and the emphasis is on imaging mid-sized breasts, Classic Tables may be preferred. If the emphasis is
on imaging larger breasts, Profile Tables may be preferred. If the site operates in the Standard or Dose
mode, and the emphasis is on imaging larger breasts, Profile Tables may be preferred. It is the
radiologist's responsibility to make the choice between configuring Profile Tables or Classic Tables.
1-3-2 Configuration process
At installation, one table or the other must be configured for each of the three AOP modes. The Field
Engineer must set the desired configuration. Note that this choice may be constrained due to regulations
in force in certain countries. These are explained in the Service Manual, and can be discussed with the
Field Engineer.
Once the Senographe Essential is installed, should you need to know which of the tables have been set,
please contact your Field Engineer.
In countries with MQSA requirements, if the AOP configuration change is made after initial installation,
the facility or the Field Engineer should notify the medical physicist of the change so that appropriate
testing can be performed under the medical physicist’s oversight. (See Chapter 2 in Senographe
Essential Acquisition System QC Manual.).
Chapter 16 Page no. 114 Exposure-modes.fm

2 Manual mode
The manual mode can be used for contact views, magnification views, for the examination of the chest
wall, and for examination of biopsy specimens and cores. Manual mode should be used for implant
imaging, a detailed procedure is available in section 3 Implants.
The Operator selects the following parameters:
• Filter (Mo, Rh)
• kV
• mAs
Select the desired track/filter configuration according to the thickness and density of the breast to be
examined, then select suitable kV and mAs values.
Note that while the examination of a very dense breast using the rhodium or molybdenum tracks
provides similar contrast images, the same breast examined via the rhodium track benefits from better
tissue visualization and a lower average glandular dose.
See table 1 Suggested manual techniques - No implant on page 116 below for suggested parameters
according to breast type and thickness. These suggested parameters are valid for routine exams (i.e.
Non-Stereotaxy exams).
See table 2 Maximum and recommended kV ranges on page 116 for available maximum and
recommended kV ranges.
For thick (>6 cm) or dense breasts, the Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh configurations may provide equivalent or
better image quality with reduced patient dose.
Although subject contrast depends on the kV value used, note that an increase in the kV value may
reduce the radiation dose to the patient. Potential contrast losses will be handled by digital image
processing.
A reduction in the kV value improves contrast but increases the radiation dose to the patient.
Increasing the kV setting by 1 or 2 kV will reduce exposure time.
In manual mode, the choice of priority to dose reduction or to the desired contrast is left to the discretion
of the Operator.
Note:
By default, the system selects the large focal spot (0.3) when a contact view is selected, and the
small focal spot (0.1) when magnification view is selected. Exposures are not possible if these
settings are overridden.
Note:
If the Operator makes a filter selection error, the system automatically changes the filter. A warning
message appears on the first line of the X-ray Console readout.

Table 1 Suggested manual techniques - No implant
Compressed Homogeneously fatty 50% fatty, 50% dense Homogeneously dense

breast
Target/ kVp mAs Target/ kVp mAs Target/ kVp mAs
thickness
Filter Filter Filter
(mm)
With grid (contact view):
< 30 Mo/Mo 25 32 Mo/Mo 26 28 Mo/Mo 26 36
30-40 Mo/Mo 26 36 Mo/Rh 26 45 Mo/Rh 27 50
40-50 Rh/Rh 28 50 Rh/Rh 29 56 Rh/Rh 29 63
50-60 Rh/Rh 29 56 Rh/Rh 29 63 Rh/Rh 30 71
60-70 Rh/Rh 29 71 Rh/Rh 29 80 Rh/Rh 30 80
70-80 Rh/Rh 29 80 Rh/Rh 30 90 Rh/Rh 31 80
> 80 Rh/Rh 30 90 Rh/Rh 30 140 Rh/Rh 31 140
Without grid (magnification view):
< 30 Mo/Mo 25 25 Mo/Mo 26 36 Mo/Mo 27 56
30-40 Mo/Mo 26 36 Mo/Mo 27 56 Mo/Rh 27 63
40-50 Mo/Rh 28 56 Rh/Rh 29 71 Rh/Rh 30 71
50-60 Rh/Rh 29 71 Rh/Rh 30 80 Rh/Rh 31 71
60-70 Rh/Rh 30 71 Rh/Rh 31 80 Rh/Rh 32 80
70-80 Rh/Rh 31 80 Rh/Rh 32 90 Rh/Rh 33 80
> 80 Rh/Rh 32 80 Rh/Rh 33 110 Rh/Rh 35 125
Table 2 Maximum and recommended kV ranges
Track Filter kV range

Maximum Recommended
Mo Mo 22 thru 32 25 thru 28
Mo Rh 22 thru 40 26 thru 30
Rh Rh 25 thru 49 28 thru 35

3 Implants
Manual mode is recommended for implant views. The suggested acquisition parameters should be used
when acquiring the images without displacing the implants. When the implant is displaced, AOP mode
can normally be used. If the PVi (Premium View optional processing) feature is enabled, "Implant
present" label must be set to "Yes" in the medical procedure card to have PVi processing applied to all
images of the patient. Premium View is explained in Chapter 21 Image processing and display, section 2
Processing, on page 177.
PVi is a processing option particularly adapted to images presenting white or dark local areas (such as
dense breast tissue or implant). If available, this processing can either be automatically applied to
images from a patient with implants, and/or replace the HIGH strength of Premium View to be applied to
all images.
3-1 Image acquisition

The Operator selects the following parameters:
• Filter (Mo, Rh)
• kV
• mAs
For implant views acquisition, we recommend the use of Rhodium track and Rhodium filter as it provides
better tissue visualization with a lower dose. Table 1 - Suggested techniques for implant views
acquisition contains suggested parameters for image Acquisition depending on breast thickness.
To use Table 1, compress the breast and read its thickness on the LCD screen. From table 1 select the
appropriate track/filter configuration, suitable kV and mAs values given the thickness.
Note:
In order to measure the correct breast thickness, ensure that compression is applied. If the patient
will not allow minimal compression, ensure that at least the paddle is in contact with the breast and
the breast is immobilized before reading the thickness on the LCD screen.
Note:
These acquisition parameters ensure a correct Contrast-to-Noise Ratio in the raw image. If you are
experiencing display issues with the processed image, see Image Display section.
Table 3 Suggested manual techniques for implant views acquisition
Exposure Parameters
Breast Thickness
Track / Filter kV mAs
Range
<40mm Rh / Rh 29 42
40mm-50mm Rh / Rh 29 45
50mm-60mm Rh / Rh 29 56
60mm-70mm Rh / Rh 30 63
70mm-80mm Rh / Rh 31 71
>80mm Rh / Rh 30 125

3-2 Image display

When "Implant present" label is set to "Yes" in the medical procedure card (see 2-1 Medical Procedure
Card on page 143) and PVi implant feature enabled, PVi processing will be applied to the images of the
patient. If the resulting displayed image is not satisfactory, it can be improved by adjusting window the
level and window width.
This can be done in either or both of two ways.
• In a systematic way by changing the Medical Application preferences menu Premium View Auto
Windowing settings.
• On an image per image basis, manually adjust the Window width (WW) and Window Level (WL).
3-2-1 Premium View Auto Windowing settings
To change Premium View auto windowing setting, see Chapter 20 Viewer, section Auto Windowing on
page 159.
You can also reprocess the image with other Premium View strength settings, if the Premium View
selection feature, or the Thickness Equalization algorithm (see Chapter 17 Browser 8-3-9 Image
Process. on page 135) is enabled.
3-2-2 Manual adjustment:
If the image appears too white:
• Increase Window level until you obtain an image with appropriate gray levels.
• Adjust Window Width until you obtain satisfactory display for the breast tissues.
If the image appears too dark:
• Reduce Window level until you obtain an image with appropriate grey levels.
• Adjust Window Width until you obtain satisfactory display for the breast tissues.
See Chapter 20 Viewer, 4-7-3 Contrast/Brightness control on page 172.
If the settings do not enable you to visualise all the breast, a different Window Width and Window Level
should be used, depending on which part of the image you want to optimize in the display.

Browser
Chapter 17 Browser
Network panel Title bar Filter panel Log off button
Tools menu button
Dicom Dicom CDR GE

IC_LMO JFR_RWSS Medical Systems
No Filter
Status line
Sep 05 2008 10:42
Remaining exposure(s) 455 Auto delete: OFF
Auto Print status
Auto print: ON
Sort by Name Sort by Number
Auto push: ON
Auto Push status
List format
button Review exam button
examination list
1/2 examinations Worklist button

patient list Sort by Number
QAP button
series list Embedded Technical

Publications button
1/10 Patients 1/2 series List Function buttons
(under each list)
Sort by Number
Sort by button above

each list
image list
Power off
1/1 images
Delete icon
1 Overview
The Browser window illustrated above (usually called “the Browser”) appears when the Senographe
Essential system is first switched on and the Operator has logged in. Note that the Tools menu function
(section 8 Tools menu utilities on page 127) allows a number of Browser display options, so the windows
and icons displayed may differ from those shown here.
The Browser is used to:
• Shut down the Senographe Essential system.
• Link with the HIS/RIS/MIS (Hospital/Radiology/Mammography Information System).
• Access the Worklist for setting up and starting patient examinations.
• Select images in the AWS database for review.
• Manage the database (in particular to remove images that are no longer required).
• Transfer images to other Workstations.
• Save images on recordable CDs for data interchange.
• Archive images (if the optional mass archiving system is present).
• Launch the embedded Technical Publications.
browser.fm Page no. 119 Chapter 17

Browser
2 Browser restart
If it is necessary to restart (reset) the Browser, proceed as follows:
• Place the cursor in the title bar at the top of the Browser window.
• Use the left mouse button to drag the window down, leaving a blank space on the screen above the
window.
• Place the cursor in the blank space; click the right button.
• Select Restart Browser from the pop-up menu.
If Network, Printing, or Save operations are in progress, a warning Restart Browser
box appears, allowing you to proceed with the restart or to cancel it.
Network queue (non empty)
Jobs in progress are interrupted and may be lost when the Browser is
restarted. Network transfers are stopped, but are automatically retried Restart Browser
after the restart. Printing and save operations are stopped, and must
be launched again after the restart. Note that interrupted save OK Cancel
operations to a CD-R may result in a partially saved file on the CD-R;

the CD-R will be unusable and must be replaced before the operation
is repeated.
3 System shutdown
• To shut down the Senographe Essential system, click the Power off icon at the lower right
of the Browser window. Power is removed from the Gantry and Generator; the Control Station follows
a shutdown procedure lasting about two minutes, designed to ensure that no information is lost.
4 Log off
• This function may be used to prevent access by unauthorized persons to the system and locally
stored patient data, especially between two acquisitions.
• To use the function, click the Logoff icon at the top right of the Browser. The system
returns to the AWS login screen (see section 1 Startup procedure on page 89 in
Chapter 12 Startup and shutdown). Follow the usual login procedure to resume
operation.
• The system administrator can configure the system to log off automatically after a chosen delay.
Chapter 17 Page no. 120 browser.fm

Browser
5 Browser display
5-1 Date Display
The date displayed on Browser is in English, regardless of the language of the system.The format of
displayed date is the month (first three letters), the day (two digits) and the year (four digits), i.e.: MMM
DD YYYY. The following table gives the English abbreviations of month names:
Month English
Abbreviation
January Jan
February Feb
March Mar
April Apr
May May
June Jun
July Jul
August Aug
September Sep
October Oct
November Nov
December Dec
5-2 Lists
The Browser contains lists showing the patients, examinations, series, and images presently on the
internal disk system:
• Patients list: patients for whom examinations are stored on the internal disk system.
• Examinations list: Examination for the selected patient.
Note: examinations are sometimes referred to as studies.
• Series list: The different series of images within the selected examination; Raw, Processed, and
Screen Save images.
• Images list: images within the selected series.
The number of items (patients, examinations, series, or images) currently selected, and the total number
of items contained in the list, appears at the lower right corner of each list.
In addition to raw and processed images acquired locally by the AWS, the Browser lists may also include
Secondary Capture (SCPT) images.
5-3 List format

• The Browser displays lists of patients, exams, etc., in the following two formats:
- Two-list format; patients, and examinations.
- Four-list format: patients, examinations, series, and images.
• To change from one format to the other, click the appropriate small icon (list format button)
just above the patients list.

Browser
5-4 Application controls

The application control buttons to the right of the Browser lists are used to review images stored on the
AWS database, to start Quality Assurance Procedures (QAP), or to input patient demographics from the
HIS/RIS.
• To review images stored on the AWS: select the desired images on the Browser, then click
the Review exam button.
• To link with the HIS/RIS and access the Worklist management function: click the Worklist
button.
• To start Quality Assurance Procedures: click the QAP button; select the required
procedure from the list presented. See the Senographe Essential Acquisition QC Manual
for more information on starting and using the Quality Assurance Procedures.
5-5 Network panel

The Network panel at the top of the Browser displays icons representing the
remote DICOM-compatible hosts and local storage devices (such as CD-R)
CDR
currently connected to the AWS. See section 7 Network transfer on page 125 Dicom
IC_LMO
Dicom
JFR_AWS
for more information.
5-6 Status display

Icons and text on the Browser Status line give status information. Not all icons are present at any one
time, depending on the installed options and current operations. Possible status indications are, from left
to right of the screen:
• Network status. A dot moving along the lower line indicates that a network
transfer is in progress.
• Media transfer status. A dot moving along the lower line indicates that a media
transfer operation (e.g., to or from CD-ROM) is in progress.
• Database query. If present, this icon indicates that a query is in progress (local internal hard
disk system access of the AWS). This icon may appear only very briefly. Any error messages
that may result from a database query are also displayed in this position.
• Filter indicator. If present, this icon indicates that a filter is currently applied (see section
9 Filters on page 138). Click the indicator to display the current local filter window.
• Current date and time and Auto Delete status. Shown in text form just below the GE logo at
the right of the screen. The status of the Auto Print, Auto Push, and Auto Delete options is also
shown (ON or OFF). Auto Delete is OFF by default. GE recommends setting the Auto Delete option
to ON when Storage Commitment from a mass archiving system is available.
• Disk space available is shown as the number of remaining exposures. Note that each exposure
includes two images (raw and processed).

Browser
6 Browser management
6-1 Viewing items in lists
If more items are present in a list than can be displayed at one time, use the scroll bar on the right of the
list to move through the items in the list (see Chapter 17 Browser for information on how to use the scroll
bar).
An arrow button beneath a list indicates that more columns of information may be available; click the
button to view the additional information.
6-2 Selecting and reviewing images

To work with the images stored on the AWS database (image review, network transfer, etc.):
• From the Browser screen, first select the patient, then the exam (study), and finally the desired
images, by clicking on them. Each selected item is highlighted in reverse video.
When any image is selected, all images of the series that includes the selected image are loaded and
displayed.
To select only a specific image for display, click it in the list. To add more images, click them in the list
while holding down the <Control> key on the keyboard.
• Click the Review exam button.
The same functions that are available after image acquisition (image adjustment, measurements,
annotations, etc.) are also available in review mode, with the exception of the 2D Loc. function.
6-3 Status of series

The Status column in the series list is used for single letter flags which indicate the status of the series:
A Archived (storage commitment received from a mass archiving system).
C Copied onto CD-R media.
P Sent to a printer (this does not guarantee that the image(s) have been printed).
S Sent to a remote DICOM-compatible host.
L Locked. Click the Lock button to lock an item.
U Unlocked. Click the Unlock button to unlock an item.
* In use (being reviewed, archived, or transferred).
Images from in-use studies cannot be removed.
6-4 Sorting lists

To sort the items in the lists according to different criteria:
• Click the Sort by button above the list you want to sort, then select the desired Sort by: Name
sorting option in the drop-down menu.

- Patient lists can be sorted by: Identifier, Name, Last study date.
- Exam lists can be sorted by: Date, Identifier, Description, Performing physician, Referring
physician.
- Series lists can be sorted by: Number, Type, Identifier, Name, Last study date.
- Image lists can be sorted by: Number, Old-to-new date, New-to-old date.

Browser
6-5 Deleting images

To delete patients, examinations, series, or images from the internal disk system of the AWS, use one of
the Delete buttons:
• EITHER: Select the items you want to delete in the corresponding list, then click the Delete button
under that list (if the button is not displayed, it can be turned on using the Tools menu).
• OR: Drag the selected item using the middle mouse button, and drop it on the large Delete
icon at the bottom right hand corner of the screen.
- A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the delete operation. Click OK to
confirm, or click Cancel to cancel the operation.
- If a delete button appears in grey, this indicates that the selected item is currently in use by an
application (Viewer or Network transfer), and therefore cannot be deleted.
• If the mass storage option is present, an Auto Delete function can be set. This automatically deletes
items from the local AWS database once they have been committed by the storage device. The
function must be activated by your GE Service Representative.
6-6 Interchange media

With the interchange media function you can use the Push button below the patient list, exam list, or
image list on the Browser to save selected information on CD-R (CD-Recordable) disks.
See Chapter 23 Interchange media.

Browser
7 Network transfer
7-1 Network options
The Senographe Essential system can be provided with a networking option, Remote host icons
allowing you to transfer acquired images to remote DICOM-compatible hosts
(e.g. review workstation, Computer Aided Detection (CAD) system, or mass
archiving system (PACs)). When the system is connected to a remote host, it Dicom Dicom CDR
JFR_AWS
is represented by a remote host icon in the Network panel. The name that IC_LMO
appears below a remote host icon is determined during installation of the Local storage device icon
networking option (host label).
When the Senographe Essential is connected to a mass archiving system, acquired images can be
transferred to the archiving system for permanent storage. A list of patients imaged on the Senographe
Essential system is maintained on the mass archiving system, ensuring quick and easy data retrieval.
Transfers are made manually or by using the Auto Push function (selected in Medical Application
preferences).
7-2 Transfer
To copy patients, studies, series, or images to another Workstation or storage device (remote host):
• Select the items you want to copy to the remote host in the patients, examinations, series, or images
list.
• EITHER: Drag the selected group, using the middle mouse button, and drop it over the icon
representing the remote host in the Network Panel,
OR: Use the Push function; click the Network Push button under the list (if the button is not
displayed, it can be turned on using Browser preferences; see section 8-2 Browser preferences on
page 127).
The Network Push window appears, listing remote hosts:
Push selected exam(s) on...
List of remote hosts

MCT_OC0
NMR1_OC0 Click the name of a remote host to select (highlight) it. To
ZNR2_IC0
select several remote hosts as targets for simultaneous
transfer, click them in the list while holding down the <Control>
key.
If necessary, use the scroll bar to move through available
remote hosts.
Selected remote host
ZNR2_IC0
OK Cancel OK: initiate transfer

Cancel: cancel the operation
Notes:
• During a transfer, the remote host icon shows a transfer animation.
• It is possible to start or review an exam on the AWS while a transfer is in progress.
• Studies which are being reviewed, saved, or transferred are flagged as “In use”. When an item is
in use, it is protected and cannot be deleted.

Browser
• When the transfer is finished, the remote host icon animation stops; the images are now available
on the selected remote host.
• If the remote host cannot be reached, a dialog box reports this fact; you should verify that the
remote host is operational.
Call your network manager if the problem persists.
• If the Auto Push option is selected in Medical Application preferences:
- With RRA disabled: Then all images in this exam will be automatically transferred to the
selected remote host after exam closure.
- With RRA enabled: Behavior is the same as above except for repeated or rejected images,
which will be automatically transferred only if Auto Push Repeated images? or Auto Push
Rejected images? are set to Yes, respectively.
• To archive exams to a mass archiving system, select the mass archiving system in the same way
as any other remote host (select its icon as the drag-and-drop target, or its address as the push
destination).
During a network transfer:
• To monitor network transfer tasks, click the Network status display to open the
Network queues window, shown below:
Network queues Job currently in progress
Push images
653/1 Active
2899 Pending
273/3
Pause Resume Clear
Pull images
653/1 Active
2899 Pending
273/3
Resume: restart a paused queue
Pause: temporarily halt the queue Click a job to select it (hold

<Control> to select more than one)
Pause Resume Clear
then click Clear to remove job(s)
Refresh: update the queue window from the queue
Refresh OK
(the queue window is NOT updated
automatically each time a job is
finished). OK: close queue window

Browser
8 Tools menu utilities

To access the various system utilities in the Tools menu:
• Click the Tools menu button (near the top right of the Browser screen) to display the utilities
menu, then select the desired item from the drop-down menu:
Filter management
Browser preferences
Messages
Network management
Worklist management
Printer Management
Review Room Management
PPS Management
Needle Setup
Medical Application preferences
Edit Patient/Procedure
Set patient anonymous
Service desktop
Copyright Info
Restart Browser
Shutdown
Note:
Only select the items shown here in bold type
Do not attempt to select the other items (shown here in italics). They are intended for use only by
your GE Service Representative and are not described here; uninformed use may lead to
unpredictable results.
8-1 Filter management

Click Filter management in the Tools menu to Update, Add, or Remove registered filters. See section
9 Filters on page 138.
8-2 Browser preferences
Click Browser preferences in the Tools menu to display the Preferences window, which allows you to set
preferences for Layout, Filter, and Sort.
• Click the selection box to display windows for each of these choices in turn. Each window displays
options which are selected by clicking to “depress” the associated buttons.
Preferences
Set preferences for: Layout

Browser
• After making selections in each window, use the five buttons at the bottom of the window to apply or
save the changes:
- Save. Apply the changes to the current display and save them. The displayed settings will
continue to be applied until changed.
- Apply. Apply the changes to the current display but do not save them. The displayed settings will
be lost when you leave the Browser.
- Reload last saved. After making and applying changes, use this button to apply the last saved
preferences.
- Reset. Apply default settings.
- Cancel. Cancel your changes and close the window.
• Layout. This window allows selection of icons and windows to be displayed in the Browser window,
as shown below:
Allow Deletion by Drag and Drop
Display only Patients and
examinations lists
Display Delete icon below each list
Display patients, examinations,

Display Network Transfer icon series, and images lists
below each list
Display interchange media icon
below each list
Display Lock icon below the series
list, to allow image protection. A
flag in the list shows protection
status as U (unlocked) or L
(locked).
• Filter. This window allows you to specify whether filters (selected from a list of registered filters)
should be applied to lists of items held locally (in the AWS) and/or items held remotely (e.g., in a
networked remote host). To manage the list of registered filters, see section 9 Filters on page 138.
No Filter
Click here to select a filter to apply to local lists of AWS
No Filter
Click here to select a filter to apply to remote lists

Browser
• Sort. Use this window to specify an order by default for displaying lists of patients and examinations,
series and images:
Modality MG
Sort patients by Last study date

Sort series by Type
Sort images by Number
Sort exams by Date
Split series
Yes No
Note:
1. You must select MG for Modality (the system currently defaults to show DX).
2. Leave the selection of Split series as Yes. Other selections are not valid for this system.
8-3 Medical Application preferences

Click Medical Application preferences in the Tools menu to set the Medical Application preferences. A
window appears similar to below.
To change a setting, click the radio button beside the option to switch it between selected ( or ) and
deselected ( or ). After making changes, click Save to apply them or Close to leave the window
without saving.
8-3-1 Auto Push
Select Auto Push ON or OFF, the type of images to be transferred, and the name of the desired remote
host. Remote host information is set up by the GE Service Representative at installation time.
MedAppPrefs
Auto Push Auto Print Annotations Auto Windowing Quality Check Auto Delete Test Hosts Names Image Process.
ON
Auto Push
OFF
Remote Hosts
loupiac Raw Proc Both None

stamour
Raw Proc Both None
Save Close

Browser
8-3-2 Auto Print

To enable Auto Print at examination closure
• Select Auto Print ON.
• Select the name of the desired DICOM printer. Information on available printers is entered by your
GE Service Representative at installation time.
• Select a review room if the Review Rooms list is not empty, depending on where the images will be
reviewed.
• Only the default print mode of Fit to Film is available.
• Select the Film size in the scrolling list:
Selected film size Image size Film size used (inches)
(inches) (centimetres)
19x23 8x10
Automatic
24x31 10x12
10x12 All image sizes 10x12
19x23 8x10
8x10
24x31 Warning to Operator that 24x31
acquired image cannot be printed on
8x10 film.
Note:
Do not click the Printer Properties ... button as it contains the current printer configuration. The
Operator does not need to change any value there to set the Auto Print function. Film size value
indicated in Printer Properties panel is the film size used for the last printing, which may have been
an auto-print or a manual print. If Auto Print is set to ON, at exam closure, the film size value that
will be considered for the Auto Print is the one of Auto Print tab. The film size value of Printer
Properties panel will be erased and replaced by the film size value set in Auto Print tab.
MedAppPrefs
ON
Auto Print
OFF
DICOM printers Review Rooms
Printer 1 MyRoom1 Print mode Fit to Film
Printer 2 MyRoom2
Film size Automatic
Number Of Copies (1.. 9)
Printer Properties ...
Save Close

Browser
8-3-3 Annotations
Select the level of screen and print annotation desired. Screen annotation levels are chosen from Full,
Partial, None, or Custom; the list of annotation types at the middle of the window shows the current
default selections for the selected level. For print annotations, select the model (1, 2, 3, or 4) to be used
by default (see Chapter 22 Printing).
Note:
Only annotation Models 3 and 4 contains all the information required by MQSA Quality
Mammography Standards.
MedAppPrefs
Patient information
Screen annotations Printing annotations
Acquisition date and time
Full Model 1
Partial Hospital information

Model 2
None X Ray parameters Model 3
Custom Model 4
Anatomical information
Processing information
Display parameters
Measurements
Save Close
8-3-4 Auto Windowing

Images are stored with four windowing levels, Standard (=750), High (= 600), Low (=1200), and User.
Select which level is to be used as the default when an image appears. When User is selected, the
system automatically optimizes the contrast (Window Width) of the image and uses this value as the
default User value if it is less than the Standard value. However, if Premium View is enabled (see 8-3-
9 Image Process. on page 135), selecting User value is considered as if Standard value was chosen.
The User level can be overwritten if the Operator saves the image with modified levels.
MedAppPrefs
Auto Windowing
Standard
High
Low
User
Save Close

Browser
8-3-5 Quality Check

Aim of the Quality Check feature
The Quality Check feature requires the Operator to apply a qualification level to each image. This
qualification level is:
• Used to trigger Auto Push and/or Auto Print,
• Used to generate image quality statistics over a given period of time (Repeat and Reject Analysis or
RRA).
How to configure Quality Check
Case 2: RRA disabled Case 1: RRA enabled
MedAppPrefs
Enable Repeat and Reject Analysis
Default image quality check Yes Yes

Auto Push Repeated images?
No No
OK Yes
Auto Push Rejected images?
NOT OK No
Yes
Auto Print Repeated images?
No
Auto Print Rejected images? Yes
No
Save Close
Initial decision: Do you need the RRA feature?

The RRA feature provides an alternative (and automated) method to the manual Repeat Analysis
method described in the Senographe Essential QC Manual.
It is mainly intended for sites that follow MQSA regulations. For such sites, it is mandatory to perform a
repeat analysis at least quarterly.
It is also useful for other sites to generate and keep statistics on:
• Total repeat and reject rates,
• The repeat reasons and reject reasons.
Case 1: RRA enabled
If you need the RRA feature, select Yes in the Enable Repeat and Reject Analysis section, then select
the cases for which you wish to make use of the Auto Print and Auto Push features.
Note:
Once RRA is enabled, the Default image quality check is set to OK and cannot be modified.

Browser
Case 2: RRA disabled

If you do not need the RRA feature, select No in the Enable Repeat and Reject Analysis section, then
select one of the Default image quality check radio buttons OK or NOT OK.
This qualification level will be applied by default to all subsequently acquired images.
Next, choose the desired behavior of Auto Print and Auto Push (see 8-3-1 Auto Push on page 129).
Note:
When RRA is disabled, the Auto Push and Auto Print settings in the Quality Check window are
grayed out and cannot be configured.
8-3-6 Auto Delete
Select the appropriate Auto Delete radio button, corresponding to whether or not you want the Auto
Delete function to be enabled. If you enabled the Auto Delete function, then specify the profile of images
to be automatically deleted. Raw and/or processed images can be automatically removed from the AWS
internal disk system when they have been transferred (sent) to another Workstation, or committed by a
mass archiver.
Note:
When the function is turned on, at least one of the profile buttons must be selected; if the disk
system's used capacity reaches the Upper Threshold value*, the oldest exams are deleted by the
system to make space for new ones, until the disk space reaches the Lower Threshold value*.
Images which have been on the disk for less than the Miminum Storage time* are not deleted.
* Values for Upper Threshold, Lower Threshold and Minimum Storage time have been adjusted
by your Field Engineer at system installation, according to the workflow information you provided
to him. Call your Field Engineer in case you want to modify those settings.
MedAppPrefs
ON
Auto Delete
OFF
Auto Delete Profile
Raw Images Sent Both Images Sent Processed Images Committed
Processed Images Sent Raw Images Committed Both Images Committed
Save Close

Browser
8-3-7 Test Hosts

Use this screen to test remote host connections. Select the host(s) to be tested in the three sections
(Remote Workstations, Remote Printers, and Remote HIS/RIS servers), and click the Test selected
hosts ... button to start the test. A message appears to indicate whether the test was successful or the
host could not be reached.
MedAppPrefs
Select remote hosts you want to test
Remote Workstations Remote Printers Remote HIS/RIS servers
Test selected hosts ...
Save Close
8-3-8 Names
Use this screen to enter and store the names of Operators, Performing physicians, and Referring
physicians. The stored names may then be recalled from the AWS database when required, avoiding the
need for retyping each time a Medical Procedure Card is created or updated.
MedAppPrefs
Define or modify names in database
Operators Performing physicians Referring physicians

Operator 1 Performing Physician 1 Referring Physician 1
Operator 2 Referring Physician 2 add
modify
delete
Save Close

Browser
8-3-9 Image Process.

Use this screen to enable or disable Fine View and/or Premium View, as well as to select the strength for
local contrast enhancement in Premium View if the Premium View feature is enabled on your equipment.
- When Fine View is set to Enable, it is applied to all images generated by the Medical Application.
Fine View shall always be enabled except for Quality Control purposes. See section 1 Raw image on
page 177 in Chapter 21 Image processing and display, for more information on using Fine View.
Note:
Fine View will always be enabled for clinical examinations.
- If Premium View is set to Disable, Thickness Equalization will be applied to all eligible processed
images generated by the Medical Application. See section 2 Processing on page 177 in Chapter 21
Image processing and display, for more information on Thickness Equalization.
- If Premium View is set to Enable, it is applied to all eligible processed images generated by the
Medical Application. See section 2 Processing on page 177 in Chapter 21 Image processing and
display, for more information on using Premium View.
Two optional features are available for Premium View:
- EPV Strength selection: When enabled, this feature allows user to choose the contrast
enhancement strength (LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH) of Premium View in the medical application
preferences.
- PVi: This optional processing is particularly adapted to images presenting white or dark local
areas (as dense breast tissue or implant). It can be automatically applied to all images of patients
having implants, and/or replace the HIGH strength of Premium View to be applied to all images.
If the Premium View strength selection feature is disabled on your equipment, the following screen is
displayed:
MedAppPrefs
Fine View Premium View
Enable Enable
Disable Disable
Save Close

Browser
If the Premium View strength selection feature is enabled on your equipment, the following screen is
displayed:
MedAppPrefs
Fine View Premium View
Enable Enable High
Disable Disable Medium
Low
Save Close
If the Premium View strength selection feature is enabled, default strength will be Medium. This value
corresponds to the Premium View strength used when the feature is not activated.
Two more strength settings are available, to provide alternative balance between local contrast and
global contrast:
- High setting should be used to get a higher local contrast
- Low setting should be used to get a lower local contrast
8-3-9-1 Optional PVi feature
PVi processing can be used in order to optimize the display of images presenting white or dark local
areas. This processing can be systematically applied to patients having implants and/or replace the
default Premium View HIGH contrast enhancement setting.
If the implant feature is enabled, PVi processing will automatically be applied to the images of the
patients for whom the implant present flag has been set to "Yes" in the medical procedure card (see
Chapter 18 Worklist, section 2-1 Medical Procedure Card). This processing will be used whatever
strength is selected in the medical application preferences.
If the replacement of the default HIGH Premium View by PVi has been enabled, PVi processing will be
applied if HIGH setting is selected in the medical preferences.

Browser
8-4 Edit Patient/Procedure

This option is normally turned off, but may be turned on by a GE Service Representative if required. It
allows information on the patient Medical Procedure Card (described in Chapter 18 Worklist) to be
viewed and modified after the exam has been closed. Changes are made by creating a new patient or a
new examination; the original file is always kept for security reasons.
Any changes made to the Patient identity information cause a new patient file to be created, with copies
of the existing exams. Fields which can be changed are: name, ID, date of birth, and sex. No change can
be made to fields such as Operator, Referring Physician, or Performing Physician. When changes are
made and a save is requested, a confirmation message appears. If the save is confirmed, a message
appears as a warning that a new entry will be made in the AWS database, and suggests that the old
information should be manually removed. Note that if the old records are not deleted, repeated use of
this facility can rapidly use up space in the AWS disk system.
8-5 Set patient anonymous

This option allows an anonymous set of images to be created, for discussion with colleagues, etc. Select
one or more patients in the Patient name list, then click the Set patient anonymous option in the Tools
menu. The patient examinations are copied and used to create a new patient with the name NO NAME
and a unique randomly created ID.

Browser
9 Filters
Filters allows the lists of patients and exams shown in the Browser to be “filtered”; in other words, to
display only items which correspond to your chosen criteria (for example, between chosen dates, with
certain Patient name or IDs, etc.).
Filters can be temporary, in which case they will be lost after the current session, or can be “registered”
as a named filter which can then be recalled for later use.
9-1 Selecting a registered filter or creating a temporary filter

The legend under the button in the Filter Panel at the top of the Browser shows the current
selection for the Browser Filter, e.g., Temp. Filter.
Temp. Filter
To change the current selection, click the Filter button in the Filter Panel and make your
selection from the drop-down menu:
Custom... Use registered filters that have been defined and saved beforehand Custom1
Custom2
(Custom1 and Custom2 in this example), Temp. Filter
No Filter
Temp. Filter Use a temporary filter,
No Filter Display all available patients, Examinations, Series, and images.

Browser
9-2 Temporary filters

For occasional queries, use a temporary filter. The filter is used only for the current Browser session and
is not saved.
Click the Filter button and select Temp. Filter in the drop-down menu.
The Local temporary filter window appears in which you can specify the filter characteristics:
• Filters can be specified at Patient level, Exam level, and Series level. By default, Patient
level is selected first, but you can select these levels in any order; click the appropriate Temp. Filter
tab at the top of the window to start specifying filter criteria:
Local temporary filter
Patient level Exam level Series level

Patient name
Begins with
Patient ID
Begins with
Apply this filter up to the selected level

Patient Exam Series
Apply Clear Cancel
- Patient level:
you can choose to begin the listing with a specified Patient name or Patient ID.
- Exam level:
you can choose to begin the listing with a specified Exam description, Performing physician or
Referring physician name, or to list only exams made between certain dates and/or times. Do not
change the default selection of mammography exams (MG), since the AWS cannot display
images from other modalities.
- Series level:
you can choose to list only exams with a specified text in the Series description, and to list only
Secondary Capture (SCPT), Raw, or Processed exams.
• When you have made your selections in each level, click one or more of the boxes at the bottom of
the screen (Patient, Exam or Series) to specify at which level the filter is to apply.
Each choice made at patient, exam, or series level allows you to select how the specified text is to be
used to select listed items:
- “Begins with”
Items are displayed if they begin with the specified letter or word(s).
- “Contains”
Items are displayed if their description contains the specified text.

Browser
- “Is”
Items are displayed only if their description exactly matches the specified text.
• At any time you can click the Clear button to delete the choices made and start again, or the Cancel
button to return to the previous screen.
• When your selections are correct, click Apply.
The filter is applied, but is lost when the current session ends.
9-3 Registered filters; Filter management

For repeated queries, use custom filters. A custom filter is defined and saved (registered) separately.
Once defined and saved, the name of the custom filter is added to the Filter menu. It can then be used at
any time, clicking the Filter button and selecting it from the drop-down menu.
• To create, update or remove a custom filter, select Filter management in the Tools menu:
The Filter selection window appears, giving a list of registered filters and a list of options:
- Update: Modify a registered filter (selected from the list)
- Add: Create a new registered filter
- Remove: Remove a registered filter
- OK: Return to the previous screen
• The default choice is Add. If you select Add or Update, the Local filter window appears, in which you
can specify the new or modified filter characteristics.
This window is identical to that used for a temporary filter, except that you must specify a name to
identify the filter. On completion, you are asked to Save the new or modified filter.
• To apply the filter, return to the Browser and select the filter using the Filter icon.
• To apply the filter in a Remote Host Browser, open the Remote Host Browser of interest and select
the filter using the Filter icon. If the desired filter has just been added or updated, first restart the
Browser for the changes to take effect in Remote Host Browsers (see section 2 Browser restart on
page 120).

Worklist
Chapter 18 Worklist
1 Worklist function
The Worklist is a list of scheduled tasks. Typically, it shows all patients scheduled for examination during
a working day.
When the Senographe Essential system is connected to a DICOM Worklist Management Service Class
Provider (SCP) system, entering the Worklist function displays a Worklist downloaded from the SCP
system, using the DICOM Basic Worklist Management Service. Downloading information in this way
reduces the Operator’s workload, increasing throughput and decreasing the risk of errors. However,
Worklist entries can also be made locally, from the AWS.
Click the Worklist icon at the right of the Browser to display the Worklist window as shown
below. To start an exam, select the required patient in the list. Selections can be made by
clicking with the left mouse button, or by entering appropriate text in one of the four Selection
Criteria text boxes above the list: Patient ID, Patient Last Name, Accession Number, or Study
ID. When the correct patient has been selected, click the Start Exam button or double-click your
selection to continue with Image Acquisition. See below for more information.
Selection Criteria
Patient ID Patient Last Name Accession Number Study ID
Status Input Start Date&Time

15:15 jones aretha +Patient Name Patient
2 ID Procedure Description
left breast Accession
2 # Study ID
15:10 smith anna 3 right breast 1
Refresh Worklist Query... Edit... Browser
Type of Exam: Routine

New Patient... Delete Delete All Start Exam
worklist.fm Page no. 141 Chapter 18

Worklist
• The Worklist title bar shows the date and time of the last update (manual or from HIS/RIS).
• Click the Browser button to return to the Browser.
• By default, when the Worklist window opens, it is sorted by Patient Name, the first item in the list in
which the number of images is zero is selected, the cursor is in the first selection criteria entry field,
and the default push-button is Start Exam.
• The Worklist information appears in columns. You can sort the entries according to the information in
any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking the title at the head of the column. For
example, to sort on patient name, click the Patient Name column header. The entries are
automatically displayed in ascending order of name, and a + sign appears in front of the title
(+Patient Name). Click the column header again; a - sign appears in front of the title (-Patient Name),
and the entries are now displayed in descending order of name.
• Items in the Worklist are selected/deselected by pointing and clicking. Non-consecutive multiple
items are selected by holding down the <Control> key while clicking. To select a range of
consecutive multiple items, select an item, then hold down the <Shift> key while clicking another;
both items and all in between are selected.
• To find and select an item in the list, use the Selection Criteria at the top of the window. As soon as a
character entry is made in one of the boxes (Patient ID, Patient Last Name, Accession Number,
Study ID), the window scrolls to show and select the first matching entry. When an entry is made in
one of the criteria boxes, the other three are automatically cleared.
• Click the Refresh Worklist button to download the current Worklist from the configured DICOM
Worklist Provider. If the DICOM Worklist feature is not installed, or the Provider is not configured, this
button is greyed out and not active.
• Click Query... to display the Query definition window, to define the networked Worklist parameters.
Query definition
Which system
This system All systems in modality All systems

Refresh worklist
Date
Today Tomorrow
Save as default
From: To:
Cancel
Patient Name:
Patient ID:
Accession #: Study ID:
- Selection of Which system:

- When This system is selected, the scheduled exams having the AE Title of the system as
ScheduledStationAETitle attribute will be queried.
- When All systems in modality is selected, the scheduled exams having MG as Modality
attribute will be queried.
- When All systems is selected, no criterion will be applied on ScheduledStationAETitle or
Modality attribute for the worklist query.
- Date selection:
The scheduled exams having their ScheduledProcedureStepStartDate within the specified date
range will be queried.
Chapter 18 Page no. 142 worklist.fm

Worklist
- Selection of Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession #, Study ID:

These query parameters are available from the Query definition interface to allow Patient based
queries.
- Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession # query fields match PatientName, PatientID,
AccessionNumber Dicom attributes respectively.
- Study ID query field matches RequestedProcedureID Dicom attribute.
• To delete selected patients from the Worklist, click the Delete button. To delete all patients, click the
Delete All button. User confirmation is requested before deletion. Note that this deletion has no effect
on patient data stored on a DICOM Worklist Provider.
• Click New Patient... to display an empty Medical Procedure Card window, allowing a new patient to
be added to the list.
• Click the Edit... button (only active if a single item is selected) to display the Medical Procedure Card
window with data for the selected item, allowing you to view and/or add information.
• If the Stereotaxy option is present, select Routine or Stereo in the Type of Exam window.
• With the correct patient selected in the Worklist, click Start Exam or double-click your selection to
display the Viewer window and allow image acquisition for the scheduled patient.
2 Image acquisition
2-1 Medical Procedure Card
The Medical Procedure Card (MPC) is used to enter all patient-, procedure- and Operator-related data.
This data is saved together with the exam images.
Note:
Patient Last Name and Patient ID are mandatory: you cannot start an exam if these fields are not
completed. The remaining information on the card is optional.
There are three ways to enter the data:
• Manually.
Enter the information directly into each of the MPC fields.
• Using a bar code scanner (optional on Senographe Essential).
If your facility produces bar code labels to identify patients and their scheduled exams, all the data
stored on the bar codes can be scanned with the bar code scanner option. Scanning produces an
MPC for each patient scanned, saving time and reducing errors as compared with an exclusively
manual data entry process.
• Through a DICOM HIS/RIS/MIS system.
In this case the Worklist receives directly from the HIS/RIS/MIS the patient and/or procedure
information needed to fill in the MPC.
Patient information and some procedure information (accession number and Study ID) received in
this way cannot be modified.

Worklist
When you select a single patient in the Worklist and click Edit..., or when you click New Patient... or Start
Exam, the Medical Procedure Card window appears. See next illustration:
Medical Procedure Card
PATIENT
Last Name Save
Middle initial
Cancel
First Name
Patient ID
Start Exam
Birth Date (Jan 02 2000) or (02 Jan 2000)

Routine Exam
Sex Male Female Other
Implant present Yes No
PROCEDURE
Study ID
Study Description
Accession Number
Procedure Description
Operator
Performing Physician
Referring Physician
Scheduled date & time May 20 2005 11:32
• For a new patient, all fields are blank; move the cursor (use the mouse, or use the Tab or Enter keys
to move through the fields) inside the Last Name, Middle initial (optional) and First Name fields and
enter the patient name. Then move the cursor inside the Patient ID field and enter the patient ID.
If the patient has an implant (in whatever breast), tick "Yes" after "Implant present" label. If Premium
View and PVi implant feature are both enabled, PVi processing will be applied to all the images of the
patient for whom the "Implant present" label has been set to "Yes". In case the review station used at
your facility can read this field, it will automatically load an adequate protocol and/or adapt the
autowindowing for review of images of this patient.
• For a new examination (existing patient) the patient information fields cannot be modified.
Complete the other fields as required, then click the Start Exam button. The Medical Procedure Card
window closes, and the Viewer appears.
• For a patient selected on the HIS/RIS Worklist, verify that the information in all fields of the Medical
Procedure Card is correct and click Start Exam to begin the exam, or Cancel.

Worklist
• After the first acquisition has been made, the information in the Medical Procedure Card cannot be
changed. However, errors can be corrected by creating duplicate information using the Edit Patient
option in the Tools menu (described in Chapter 17 Browser). The original information is saved for
security.
2-2 Image Acquisition - New Patient...

To start an exam for a new patient:
• Click the New Patient... button.
The Medical Procedure Card window appears.
Note:
A patient must have unique identifiers (name and ID mandatory, first name optional).
• When the card entries are complete, click Save to add the patient to the Worklist for future use, Start
Exam to begin the exam, or Cancel to exit.
If Start Exam is selected, the Viewer opens with the Medical Procedure Card displayed.
Check the information displayed. If it is not correct, do not proceed; select Cancel and confirm to
close the Viewer. On returning to the Worklist, select the correct patient and select Edit.... Make any
changes required, then click Start Exam to again open the Viewer with the Medical Procedure Card
displayed. If the information is now correct, begin the first acquisition.
2-2-1 Patient Birth Date
To enter the Birth Date in the Medical Procedure Card, type the month (first three letters), space, the day
(two digits), space, and the year (four digits), i.e.: MMM DD YYYY. The first three letters of the month
must be typed in English, regardless of the language of the system. The following table gives the English
abbreviations of month names:
Month English
Abbreviation
January Jan
February Feb
March Mar
April Apr
May May
June Jun
July Jul
August Aug
September Sep
October Oct
November Nov
December Dec

Worklist
2-3 Edit Patient

To edit patient information (only possible before making the first acquisition for the patient):
• Select the patient in the list and click the Edit... button.
The Medical Procedure Card window appears.
This function is not available for information received from an HIS/RIS Worklist.
• When the changes to card entries are complete, click Save button or Start Exam button.
2-4 Image Acquisition - New examination

To add an exam for an existing patient:
• Select the patient name in the patient list on the Worklist by clicking on it.
• Click the Start Exam button.
The remaining procedure is the same as for a new patient, except that the patient and procedure
information fields (other than Operator and physician) in the Medical Procedure Card are already
complete and cannot be modified (displayed in grey).
2-5 Image review

To review images stored on the AWS disk system, return to the Browser screen: see section 6-
2 Selecting and reviewing images on page 123 of Chapter 17 Browser.

Worklist
3 Bar code scanner option

The bar code scanner is a fast optional tool for scanning bar code symbols in AWS applications. Its
support is mechanically mounted on the side of the AWS Cabinet.
The scanner captures entire bar code symbols instantly. The integrated decoder then transmits the data
to the AWS just as if data were entered from the AWS keyboard.
It supports Code 39 (aka 3 on 9) standard and full ASCII, Code EAN13 and Code 128.
3-1 How to read a bar code symbol

The bar code scanner is simple to use - just aim and press the scanner trigger. Before using it, make
sure all cable connections are secure.
1. Lift the scanner from its support; Hold it naturally in one hand, with your finger on the scanner trigger.
Hold the scanner handle horizontally, with the beam window directly over the sample bar code
symbol shown here:
2. Press the scanner trigger: the scanner LED beam lights. The scanner has successfully read the
symbol if:
• You hear a beep.
• The LED beam turns off.
3-2 Using the scanner for AWS text entry

To enter text in AWS data entry fields using the bar code scanner:
1. Set the cursor in the desired data entry field in the usual way, as if you were about to use the
keyboard for text entry.
2. Scan the appropriate bar code symbol as described in section 3-1 How to read a bar code symbol on
page 147. The decoded text appears in the text field just as if you typed it using the keyboard.

Worklist
3-3 What If...?

• Nothing happens when you follow the operating instructions:
- Check the system power.
- Check for loose cable connections.
• The AWS goes back to monitor OK prompt:
- Resetting or disconnecting/reconnecting the bar code scanner may cause the AWS to return to
the monitor OK prompt. In this case:
Type the command go <Enter> to return to the normal working mode.
• The scanner does not read a bar code symbol:
- Be sure the bar code symbol is not defaced.
- Be sure that you are holding the scanner correctly to scan the symbol, as illustrated below. The
scan beam must touch and cover every bar and space on the symbol. You can tilt the scanner
forward or backward. Practice will quickly show you how to hold the scanner.
Scan beam surface
Right Wrong
- If the scanning still fails, contact your Field Engineer to check the setup of the bar code scanner.

Modality Performed Procedure Step (PPS)
Chapter 19 Modality Performed Procedure Step (PPS)
1 Overview
The Modality Performed Procedure Step (PPS) function is an automated function that allows the
Senographe Essential acquisition system to automatically inform a remote network host (typically
located on the Radiology Information System (RIS) or the Picture Archiving and Communications
System (PACS)) of the Radiology department about the completion status of the locally performed
examinations. Typically, it enables the Senographe Essential to automatically inform the other
connected devices such as the PACS, the Computer Aided Detection (CAD) system and the RIS
whether a given scheduled or unscheduled exam is in progress, completed or on hold.
The activation of this function within a Radiology Department is subject to the following pre-requisites:
• An image archiving system (PACS) must be accessible for Auto Push of the acquired images via the
DICOM protocol.
• A DICOM Performed Procedure Step Service Class Provider (PPS SCP) must be connected to the
Senographe Essential. In general, such a DICOM service is available from either the RIS or the
PACS.
• It is strongly recommended that the Senographe Essential also be connected to a DICOM Worklist
Management SCP for automated Worklist retrieval. For additional information on the Worklist
function, see Chapter 18 Worklist.
pps.fm Page no. 149 Chapter 19

2 Operation
Once activated, the PPS function performs background tasks to exchange information with the
configured PPS SCP. This function is activated for both routine and stereotactic (if the option is present)
examinations.
When the Viewer is started and after the first image has been acquired, an initial PPS message is sent
from the AWS to the PPS SCP to inform it that the examination is now in progress. This message also
contains the patient and clinical data stored in the Worklist entry used to launch the Viewer. These data
can either have been downloaded from a Worklist server or entered manually on the AWS itself.
When the Viewer is closed, a second PPS message is sent to the PPS SCP to update the examination
data with the following information:
• A Operator-selected exit status (see section 4 PPS in the Viewer on page 151).
• A list of the images that will be automatically sent, via the Auto Push feature, to the associated Image
Archiver or CAD.
Note:
In order for the PPS messages to be sent, the Auto Push feature from AWS to the associated
Image Archiver or CAD must be activated.
Note:
In case some images have been excluded from the Auto Push list (e.g. using the Quality Check
feature) those images will not be listed in the PPS messages sent to the PPS SCP.
• The cumulative AGD (Average Glandular Dose) calculated based on the AGD estimation available
for images acquired in AOP. This dose per examination estimation is computed using the following
rule: images that have been acquired and excluded from the Auto Push list (e.g. using the Quality
Check feature) are accounted for in the overall dose value.
3 PPS configuration
PPS configuration is accessed by clicking the Tools menu button and selecting PPS Management as
shown in section 8 Tools menu utilities on page 127 of Chapter 17 Browser.
Note:
The PPS Management panel is not intended for use by Operators of the Senographe Essential,
and therefore is not described here. Refer to your GE Service Representative (or possibly your
local network administrator) for assistance on setting up PPS hosts, as unassisted use may lead
to unpredictable results.
Chapter 19 Page no. 150 pps.fm

4 PPS in the Viewer

To be able to optimize post acquisition tasks, the Senographe Essential sends a completion status
message to the PPS SCP when the exam is started and when it is closed.
When a routine or stereotactic examination is started, and the first image has been acquired, the
Senographe automatically sends an IN PROGRESS status to the PPS SCP.
When the Operator closes this Viewer session, one of two possible completion status messages is sent
to the PPS SCP:
• COMPLETED: The procedure described in the Worklist entry used to perform the acquisitions of this
Viewer session has been completed. No further images are to be acquired for this procedure.
• DISCONTINUED: The procedure described in the Worklist entry used to perform the acquisitions of
this Viewer session is not completed. Most likely further images will be acquired for this procedure to
be completed.
By default, all closed examinations are defaulted to sending the COMPLETED status to the remote PPS
SCP. In order to switch the status to DISCONTINUED, select the Interrupt exam check box that appears
in the Question dialog box of the Viewer:
Question
Do you really want to close the exam?

Please confirm
This is a normal close by default.

To interrupt the exam, check the box
Interrupt exam
Yes No
OR
Question
Closing the exam without saving will result in the loss of user
modifications made to one or more image.
This is a normal close by default.

To interrupt the exam, check the box
Interrupt exam
Exit with save Exit without save Cancel
pps.fm Page no. 151 Chapter 19

Chapter 19 Page no. 152 pps.fm

Viewer
Chapter 20 Viewer
1 Overview
The Viewer window appears when:
- the Review exam button in the Browser window is clicked after selection of a Patient, examination, or
series. The Viewer window opens and displays the first acquired image.
- the Start Exam button in the Worklist window is clicked after selection of a Patient in the Worklist. The
Viewer window opens, with the Medical Procedure Card displayed, ready to display the acquired
image.
The Viewer window allows you to display, manipulate, and analyze images that have either been
acquired using the Digital Detector or recalled from the disk system for review:
View Composition
Zoom
Fit to True
1
3 Display Parameters
Inv. Standard
4
Reproce Quality
• Most of the screen is used for the Viewing Area (1), in which images are displayed.
• At the left of the screen, there is a Command window, which includes three main sections:
- The Mosaic Image Browser (2).
- The Control Panel (3).
Two selection buttons at the top of the panel allow one of two different Control Panels (View
Control and Annotation) to be displayed, according to the functions required. A third selection is
possible if the Stereotaxy option is present. Functions available from the two panels are
described in sections 2 View Control on page 157 and 3 Annotation on page 159.
- Function panel (4). Provides access to the Medical Procedure Card, image reprocessing, image
printing, scrapbook, image quality check, Middle mouse button function selection, and exit from
the Viewer. See section 4 Function panel on page 167 for more details.
• To leave the Viewer, click the Close Exam button in the Function panel. All changes to
annotations are saved. They are saved locally but are not transmitted to the Seno Advantage or
PACs. If changes have been made to brightness or contrast settings, you are asked to Exit with save,
Exit without save, or Cancel.
viewer.fm Page no. 153 Chapter 20

Viewer
1-1 Viewing area

You can choose to have one, two or four images displayed in the viewing area. See section 2 View
Control on page 157 on how to select the desired layout.
To make it easier to view the images in the viewing area, you can place a "shutter" (mask) over the
command window.
• Pressing the <F10> function key (in the top row on the keyboard) allows you to toggle between
masking and unmasking the command window.
1-1-1 FB view exception
On the AWS, the View and Laterality indication is placed in the lower part of the monitor.
Most images of the breast are presented with the axillary region in the upper part of the monitor.
The FB (From Below) views, i.e., radiographic images taken with the X-ray tube directly below the breast
(Arm angle between +170° and +185°), are presented in deviation to this practice and have the axillary
region in the lower part of the monitor.
CAUTION
Except for the case of FB views, the View and Laterality indication is NOT positioned near the
axilla.
Note:
If the Operator has performed rotations or flips to the image on the Viewer, the axilla might be in a
different position from that stated above. The Operator can always use the "Display Normal"
function to restore the initial image display. In any case, the rotations and flips applied to the
images are not stored at exam closure.
Chapter 20 Page no. 154 viewer.fm

Viewer
The table below clarifies the orientation of images and their respective View and Laterality marker
positions on the AWS monitor:
General case for View and Laterality label Axilla
Left Views incorrectly positioned.
View & Lat.
LFB Axilla
View & Lat.
General case for Axilla View and Laterality label

Right Views incorrectly positioned.
View & Lat.
RFB Axilla
View & Lat.

Viewer
1-2 Mosaic Image Browser

The Mosaic Image Browser shows the content of the current exam in the
form of thumbnail (reduced size) images. Up to eight such images can be
displayed at one time.
If the current exam contains more than eight images, use the Img. up/down
arrow buttons to scroll through the full set.
To view images from the next or previous Series or Exam, use the
corresponding up-down arrow buttons (Ser. or Exam.).
Note:
If both routine (non-stereo) and stereo series/exams co-exist for a
patient, and you start the review with a routine series/exam, you will not
be able to access stereo series/exams.
Click the desired image in the Mosaic Image Browser to display it in the viewing area.
A white dot in the top left of the reduced image in the Mosaic Image Browser identifies the currently
displayed image.
A camera icon appears above the arrow buttons when the Viewer is being used for image
acquisition. When the Viewer is used for image review, the icon appears with a bar , and image
acquisition is inhibited.
1-3 Image selection

To work on an image in the viewing area, it must be selected (active). To select an image, click
anywhere on it. The currently selected image is identified by a large white dot in the upper left corner of
its thumbnail.

Viewer
2 View Control
To use the View Control Panel, click the View Control icon to highlight it.
View Composition. Click the appropriate icon to display a single image, two
images side by side, two images one above the other, or four images.
Images are arranged in order (left to right, top to bottom) according to the order in View Composition
which they were acquired. To display images on the monitor according to the ACR
standard, they should therefore be acquired in the order: RCC, LCC, RMLO,
LMLO. Zoom
Fit to True
Zoom: Click the appropriate Zoom icon to choose a Zoom mode. See 2-1 Zoom on Screen Size
page 157.
Contrast and Brightness (window width and window level, respectively) Display Parameters
sliders. See 2-2 Contrast and Brightness sliders on page 158.
2D Loc.. Click this icon to display horizontal and vertical lines on the screen; they
can be moved with the mouse to identify a particular position on the image. This
facility is available only in acquisition mode (with the camera icon displayed in
the Mosaic area). See 2-3 2D Loc. - electronic Cross-hairs on page 158.
Image Control: Use these controls to choose appropriate display parameters. See Inv.. Standard
2-4 Image control on page 159.
2-1 Zoom
Applying a Zoom factor is a way of fitting more (or less) of the captured image into the viewing screen, by
adjusting the resolution. The Zoom factor is not applied to the real size of the object, it is applied to a
notional linear dimension on a reference plane 2 cm above the breast contact surface. When the image
is first displayed in the viewing area, it appears with a Zoom factor called “Fit to Screen”, which is
calculated to adjust the image size so that it fits the entire available viewer area.
Click the appropriate Zoom button to select the desired Zoom factor:
- Zoom=1 corresponds to a full resolution display: each pixel on the screen corresponds to a pixel
on the Digital Detector.
- Zoom=1/2 corresponds to a half resolution display: a pixel on the screen corresponds to an
average of 4 pixels on the Digital Detector.
- Fit to Screen: the image appears at a Zoom factor that optimizes the screen layout.
- True Size: the image on the screen appears with a zoom factor such that a linear dimension,
which is contained in the reference plane, is represented at its true size on the monitor. This
facility is not available when viewing SCPT images.
WARNING
When a small image and a large one are displayed side by side, both with zoom "Fit to Screen",
there is no consistency in size between them, as a different zoom factor is applied to each of
them.

Viewer
2-2 Contrast and Brightness sliders

To use the contrast and brightness sliders for precise adjustment of image contrast and brightness, you
can:
• Select the slider cursor (small box inside the slider bar) and drag it left or right as required. The value
above the slider changes accordingly (higher values indicate less contrast or increased brightness)
and the screen displays the change in contrast or brightness.
• Click the left arrow or right arrow buttons, just below each slider, to change contrast or brightness by
small increments.
• Click inside the slider bar, on the left or on the right of the cursor, to change contrast or brightness by
large increments.
The adjustment only acts on the currently selected image (primary selection, indicated by the large white
dot in the top left corner).
Note:
You can also use the auto windowing selection button (see 2-4 Image control on page 159) or the
Multi-Function mouse button for contrast and brightness control (see section 4-7 Middle Mouse
button on page 172).
2-3 2D Loc. - electronic Cross-hairs
In acquisition mode (with the camera icon displayed in the Mosaic area), the 2D Loc. function allows
you to display and position a set of electronic Cross-hairs on the image.
These are used on images acquired using one of the optional 2D localization paddles (graduated 2D
large localization paddle or 2D spot localization paddle) to precisely locate a point of interest on the
image, in order to introduce a needle or to position a marker for a tangential view. For full details about
the 2D localization procedure, see Chapter 24 2D Localization examination.
• Click the 2D Loc. button to display the electronic Cross-hairs on the image.
• Move the mouse pointer onto the intersection of the electronic Cross-hairs, then press and hold the
left mouse button. The cursor changes to a pencil shape; move the Cross-hairs by moving the
mouse.
Move the electronic Cross-hairs exactly over the point of interest; you can now read their position
relative to the graduations of the compression paddle on the image. It may be necessary to first
select Zoom mode 1 or 1/2 to view the area of clinical interest, then to reduce the Zoom factor to see
the paddle alpha-numerics for Cross-hair location.
• Click the 2D Loc. button again to remove the electronic Cross-hairs.
Note:
When you close the exam (Exit with save), any 2D Localization electronic Cross-hairs on an image
will be saved with the image, and will be available for display again when the image is selected for
review at a later stage. On an image that has been saved on the database and is recalled in image
review mode, the 2D Localization electronic Cross-hairs can no longer be modified or deleted.
However, they can be alternately displayed or hidden by clicking the 2D Loc. button.

Viewer
2-4 Image control

Invert
Click the Inv. button to invert the image contrast and brightness values, so that any microcalcifications
present appear black. Press the button again to return the display to the original default values, so that
microcalcifications appear white.
Auto Windowing
• Four windowing values are stored with the image: Standard, High, Low, and User. Use the Medical
Application Preferences Auto Windowing panel (see Chapter 17 Browser) to select which of these
values is used by default when first displaying an image in the Viewer. When User is selected, the
system automatically optimizes the contrast (Window Width (WW)) of the image and uses this value
as the default User value if it is less than the Standard value. When User is selected, and the WW
value computed is greater than the Standard value, the Standard setting is used instead. The User
level can be overwritten if the Operator saves the image with modified levels.
User behavior described above is only when TE (Thickness Equalization) processing is applied.
However, if Premium View is enabled (see 8-3-9 Image Process. on page 135), selecting User value
is considered as if Standard value was chosen.
• The button at the bottom right of the View Control panel shows the name of the windowing value
currently applied. To change it, click the button and select the desired setting from the drop-down
menu.
3 Annotation
To use the Annotation Level Control Panel, click the Annotation “pencil” icon to highlight it.
Annotation Level: Click the appropriate icon to select the required annotation level. Annotation Level
See 3-2 Annotation Level on page 161.
Full Partial None Custom
Graphics & Meas.: Click the appropriate icon to select and display a measurement Graphics & Meas.
tool, to add annotations, or to hide or erase displayed tools and annotations. See
3-3 Graphics and measurements on page 162.
Hide Erase all
Geom. Transformations: Click the appropriate icon to flip or rotate the image, or on Geom. Transformations
the Display Normal button to return to the original display. See 3-4 Geometric
transformations on page 164.
Display Normal
Change View name: Click the Change View name button to make a correction to
Laterality and View name, if these were incorrectly selected on X-Ray Console. Change View name
See 3-5 Change View name on page 164.

Viewer
3-1 Annotation Content

Annotations available on the image are:
- Patient information (Name, ID, date of birth, age, Laterality, view name)
- Acquisition date and time
- Hospital information
- X Ray parameters (Entrance Skin Exposure, Average Glandular Dose, mAs, kV, Focal Spot, Track,
Filter, Thickness, Compression force, exposure mode)
- Anatomical information (Magnification factor)
- Processing information (Type*, date and time)
- Display parameters (window width, window level, zoom factor, image size, FOV)
- Measurements (annotations associated with measurements)
* Processing type depends on settings made in Medical Application preferences panel (see section 8-
3 Medical Application preferences on page 129 in Chapter 17 Browser). In case Premium View is not
enabled, Thickness Equalization applies, or Auto-contrast for specific cases.
Cases when Thickness Equalization cannot apply are described in section 2 Processing on page 177 in
Chapter 21 Image processing and display.
Processing type displayed on the image can be one of the following:
• PROC_0, meaning that:
- Fine View processing not applied before the raw image
- Auto-Contrast processing applied on the raw image.
• PROC_1, meaning that:
- Thickness Equalization processing applied on the raw image
• PREMIUM_VIEW, meaning that:
- Premium View processing applied on the raw image
• PROC_0_FV, meaning that:
- Fine View processing applied before the raw image
- Auto-Contrast processing applied on the raw image
• PROC_1_FV, meaning that:
- Thickness Equalization processing applied on the raw image
• PREMIUM_VIEW_FV, meaning that:
- Premium View processing applied on the raw image

Viewer
3-2 Annotation Level

Image size and FOV size are symbolized by [ ] and #, respectively. For example, when the 13 x 18 FOV
is used, the annotation is [ ] 19 x 23 # 13 18.
System annotations are displayed automatically. They show exam-related information such as patient
name, patient ID, kV and mAs used, window width (WW) and window level (WL), etc. The Operator can
add further annotations (see section 3-3 Graphics and measurements on page 162).
• To select which annotations are displayed, click the desired
button on the control panel:
Full Partial None Custom
- Full: All annotations are displayed.
- Partial: A predefined subset of annotations appears. This
facility is not available when viewing SCPT images.
- None: No annotation appears on the image.
- Custom: This button opens the Custom window (shown below) with the list of available annotation
groups. This facility is not available when viewing SCPT images.
Custom Annotations window:
Patient name, patient ID, patient date of birth, patient age, laterality, Annotations
anatomical view name
1: Patient information
Acquisition date and time
2: Acquisition date and time
Hospital/Unit name 3: Hospital information
ESE*, AGD*, mAs, kV, focal spot, track, filter, compressed breast 4: X Ray parameters
thickness, compression force, exposure mode
5: Anatomical information
Magnification factor 6: Processing information
Processing type, processing date and time 7:Display parameters
WW, WL, zoom factor, image size, FOV size 8: Measurements
Annotation associated with measurements
OK Cancel
* ESE Entrance Skin Exposure
*AGD Average Glandular Dose
• A check box appears next to each group. To select the annotation groups that you want
displayed, click the corresponding check box. To deselect a group, click the button a second time.
• Click the OK button to use the selected annotations, or the Cancel button to cancel the operation.
WARNING
When there is no consistency in size between images displayed side by side, there will be no
indication of relative size if the display parameters (zoom factor, image size and FOV size) are
hidden.

Viewer
3-3 Graphics and measurements

These buttons allow you to add graphic and text annotations to the image, and perform measurements.
You can add several graphic annotations (line segments and ellipses) to the same image. Each
annotation is identified by a number, which appears next to the annotation. The corresponding
measurements, with the same identification number, are displayed in the bottom right corner of the
image. Only the three most recent measurements are displayed.
In Review mode, you must select the graphical annotations added in acquisition mode in order to display
the measurements.
To recall an earlier measurement value on the screen, click the corresponding line segment or ellipse.
Segment
• Click the Segment button to place on the image a line segment that you can use to measure
the distance between two points.
- The squares at each end of the segment are called handles.
- Press and drag on either of the handles to move the corresponding end of the segment to the
desired position. The size and angle of the segment follow the movement of the handles.
- To move the whole segment, select the segment by clicking on any point along the line (except
the handles) and drag the segment to the desired position.
The length of the segment (in millimeters) and the angle between the segment and the vertical (in
degrees) are displayed in the bottom right corner of the image.
Ellipse
• Click the Ellipse button to place on the image an ellipse, that you can use to highlight an area
of interest, or to measure the area delimited by the ellipse.
- The ellipse appears with four handles around it, four tick marks on the ellipse itself, and a
cross mark in the center.
- To change the size and shape of the ellipse, press and drag on the handles.
- To rotate the ellipse around its center, press and drag on any of the tick marks.
- To move the actual ellipse, press anywhere on the ellipse (except for the tick marks), or on the
center cross, and drag the ellipse to its desired position.
The area of the ellipse (in square millimeters), and the mean and standard deviation of the pixel
values within the ellipse, are displayed in the bottom right corner of the image.
WARNING
All measurement calculations for graphical annotations (length, surface area, etc.) are made in a
reference plane which is 2 cm above the breast contact surface. These values therefore do not
correspond to the true size of an object unless it is situated in the reference plane.
It is not possible to determine in the 2D projection image if a pathological feature is situated in the
reference plane, so these measurement tools must not be used to measure the size of
pathological features. Furthermore, it is not possible to duplicate breast position from one exam
to another, so they must not be used to compare the size of pathological features over time.

Viewer
Text annotation
• This function allows you to add text annotations on the image, for example to highlight a specific
point for further reference, or as a communication tool for another practitioner.
Click the aA button to open the Annotations window, shown below:
Annotations
Text area
Arrow
Apply Cancel No arrow
• Move the mouse pointer inside the text area, and type the required text.
• Press the <Enter> key to start a new line. To make corrections, move the mouse pointer to the
desired place and click, to position the text cursor. You can now insert text, or press the
<Backspace> key to delete text.
• An arrow pointing to the area of interest can be attached to the annotation. To do this, enable the
Arrow check box.
• When you have entered the desired text, click the Apply button. The Annotations window closes, and
the text annotation appears on the image.
• To position the text annotation, click it to select it, and then drag it to the desired position.
• If you chose to attach an arrow, you can now also click the tip of the arrow and drag it to the desired
position. The length of the arrow is adjusted automatically.
Note:
Annotations added by the Operator on the AWS are present only on the AWS and on images
printed from the AWS. They are lost during image transfer to another workstation.
Displaying and Removing User Annotations
To hide all Operator annotations (graphics and text) on an image temporarily:
• Click the Hide/Show button. Hide
• To display the annotations again, click the button a second time.

The button legend alternates between Hide and Show. When Hide is selected, other measurement
tools are not available.
To delete a Operator annotation (graphic or text) permanently:
• Select the annotation by clicking on it. The annotation is highlighted.
• Click the Eraser button to delete the highlighted annotation.

Viewer
To delete ALL USER annotations (graphics and text) present on the image permanently:
• Click the Erase all button. You are asked to confirm the deletion (Yes or No).
Erase all
Note:
The system annotations cannot be deleted, but you can use the Annotation Level
buttons to set the amount of system annotation displayed. See section 3-2 Annotation Level on
page 161.
3-4 Geometric transformations
The buttons in this area of the panel allow you to flip or rotate the image to improve viewing comfort or
for easier comparison with other images.
• Click the button for the desired action:
- Flip image around horizontal axis. The top of the image becomes the bottom, and
vice-versa. Left/right orientation is unchanged.
- Flip the image around vertical axis. The left of the image becomes the right, and
vice-versa. Up/down orientation is unchanged.
- Rotate the entire image 90 degrees to the left.
- Rotate the entire image 90 degrees to the right.
• Click Display Normal to return the image to the initial orientation (regardless of how
Display Normal
many flip and rotate operations were performed).
3-5 Change View name

3-5-1 Overview of Change View name
It may occur that when viewing an image, the Operator realizes that the View name displayed is
incorrect. The Change View name function allows the Operator to modify the Laterality and View name
of an image just acquired without repeating the exposure.
• The function is not available in stereotaxy mode.
• The function is available in (active) Acquisition mode only, not in Review (i.e., only before the
examination is closed).
• Laterality and View name changes can be applied to:
- The raw and processed images just acquired.
- Any re-processed images of the current examination.
Note:
For recumbent patients, View names can only be changed to recumbent View names. For standing
patients, View names can only be changed to standing View names. It is not possible to change
from recumbent to standing View names.

Viewer
3-5-2 How to use Change View name

Assuming that you have already taken an exposure and obtained the raw and processed images,
proceed as follows:
• Check the Laterality displayed on the image. If you find that you have incorrectly selected it on the X-
ray Console, then proceed to the steps given below.
- Before closing the exam, open the Annotations panel.
- Click Change View name button: The Laterality and View name selection dialog box appears.
Laterality and View name selection
Laterality View name
Save
Cancel
In example above: Default selections of Laterality and View name are displayed in the panel
for an image acquired with Laterality = L and positioner angle = - 35°
- In this panel, select the correct Laterality (R in the present example) and the View name.
The list of Laterality/View name available depends on position of the Gantry; see section 3 View
names code chart on page 104 in Chapter 14 View name selection for the complete list in all
positioner configurations.
Laterality and View name selection
Laterality View name
Save View name with suffix "S"
Cancel
New View name list after Laterality selection = R

for an image initially acquired with Laterality = L and positioner angle = -35°

Viewer
Note:
The view prefix cannot be modified: if a Magnification stand was present for the image acquired,
the prefix ("M") is automatically kept for the View name.
• At this point, you can either Cancel or Save the selection:
- If you click the Cancel button, the Laterality for the raw, processed, and all reprocessed images
from this raw, remains as previously selected (i.e., "L" in the present example).
- If you click the Save button, the new Laterality applies for the raw, processed and all reprocessed
images from this raw file (i.e., "R" in the present example).
3-5-3 Resulting image display
The currently displayed image may be rotated by 180° on the monitor, depending on the chosen View
name, as described in the table below:
New View name selected Laterality chosen Impact on image display on the monitor
CC R The image appears with chest wall on the RIGHT.
XCCM
L The image appears with chest wall on the LEFT.
XCCL
FB
CV Does not matter. 180° rotation is not applied.
MLO
AT
SIO
LMO
LM
ML
3-5-4 Printing the image

The new Laterality and View name are taken into account when the image is printed:
- The new Laterality and View name are printed.
- The printed image is consistent with the image displayed in the Viewer (if chest wall side appears on
the right of the Viewer, it is printed on the right of the film as well).

Viewer
4 Function panel
The Function Panel is used to exit from the Viewer, as well as for access to
information on the Medical Procedure Card, Scrapbook, Quality Check,
Image reprocessing, Print, and Middle mouse button functions.
Quality
Reprocess
Check
4-1 Medical Procedure Card

Click this button to view information on the currently selected patient.
4-2 Scrapbook
Click this button or press the <F3> keyboard button to open the Scrapbook. This allows you
to position selected images on Scrapbook “pages”, ready for printing. See section
5 Scrapbook on page 173 for more information.
4-3 Reprocess
Click this button to apply the selected processing algorithm to the currently selected image.
Reprocess
If the image has already been correctly processed, or if it is an SCPT image, the operation
will have no effect on the image, but a new processed image, identical to the first one, will
be created.
Depending on the processing selected (PV or TE), you can select the alternative processing under Tools
/ Medical Application Preferences and then reprocess the raw image to have both TE and PV.
4-4 Close exam (Exit Viewer)
Click this button to leave the Viewer and return to the Browser. If an exam has been
reviewed with no changes, the Viewer closes with no message.
• If changes have been made to image WW or WL, a confirmation box appears (Exit with
save, Exit without save, Cancel).
• If New Acquisition has been selected, but closed before images were acquired, a confirmation box
appears (Yes or No).

Viewer
4-5 Quality Check

Two cases are possible for the Quality Check function: With Repeat and Reject Analysis (RRA) either
enabled, or disabled.
4-5-1 Case 1: RRA enabled
4-5-1-1 Introduction
If you determine that an image is of satisfactory quality, the qualification level Accepted is applied by
default, and Auto Push and/or Auto Print transfers are triggered according to the settings in the Medical
Application preferences window when the exam is closed.
On the other hand, if you determine that an image has to be repeated or rejected, you must qualify it as
such.
In all cases, each image’s qualification level is recorded in a specific database when the exam is closed.
You can apply one of three qualification levels to an image:
- Accepted (default level),
- Repeated, or
- Rejected.
The consequences on image transfer (Auto Push and Auto Print) are applied as indicated in the next
table:
QUALITYCHECK Buttons
First Selection Second Selection Consequence on Image Transfer
QUALITYCHECK OK Accepted Auto Print and/or Auto Push, according to settings in Medical
(default level) Application preferences window.
If Auto Print/Auto Push are set to ON in the Medical
Application preferences window:
Auto Print/Auto Push functions behave according to the
settings in the Quality Check panel in the Medical Application
preferences window.
Repeated If Auto Print/Auto Push are set to OFF in the Medical
QUALITYCHECK NOK (selected level) Application preferences window:
Auto Print/Auto Push functions do not operate, regardless of
Rejected
the settings in the Quality Check panel in the Medical
(selected level)
Application preferences window.
Qualification does not modify the image itself; it only records the applied image qualification level in a
specific database on the AWS. All qualification statistics are generated from this database.
Rejected images
Most of the time these are non-clinical images, such as Calibration or Quality Control (QC) images.
Occasionally a clinical image may not be worth keeping or the Operator will choose not to retake the
same view.
Repeated images (to be retaken)
In the RRA feature, Repeated means that the corresponding view will have to be retaken, or has been
retaken. An image can be qualified as Repeated either before or after the view has been retaken.
It is the responsibility of the Operator to actually retake the exposure. The examination should not be
completed before the exposure has been retaken.

Viewer
Repeated or Rejected images

Images qualified as Repeated or Rejected are not deleted from the AWS database.
Even in the specific case with:
- Auto Push Repeated images? and Auto Push Rejected images? both set to No in Medical
Application preferences, Quality Check part (see section 8-3-5 Quality Check on page 132 in
Chapter 17 Browser),
- Storage commitment activated on the station,
- Auto delete: ON,
the Repeated and Rejected images are not deleted unless they are manually pushed to a remote
DICOM-compatible host (e.g. review workstation, Computer Aided Detection (CAD) system, or mass
archiving system). Subject to automatic deletion, therefore, they must be either deleted manually or
pushed manually to a remote DICOM-compatible host (e.g. review workstation, Computer Aided
Detection (CAD) system, or mass archiving system).
4-5-1-2 Procedure to qualify an image
1. While viewing a processed image in acquisition mode, the interactive QUALITYCHECK current level
status in the Viewer Function panel indicates the current level (QUALITYCHECK OK or
QUALITYCHECK NOK): default level is QUALITYCHECK OK.
If you decide that the quality of an image is not satisfactory, click the interactive QUALITYCHECK
current level status (QUALITYCHECK OK) to open the Repeat or Reject Selection window:
Display Parameters
Repeat or Reject Selection
Mark the selected image as Accepted, Repeated or Rejected

Accepted
Repeated (must do the exposure again to complete exam)
Rejected (no clinical value, no additional exposure to complete exam)
Select a Repeat or Reject reason Save

Positioning
Patient Motion
Poor Compression Cancel
Improper Detector Exposure
X-Ray Equipment Failure
Equipment Artifacts
Blank Image
Inv.. Standard Clinical Artifacts
Incorrect View Marker
QC, Acceptance Tests, Calibration
Interventional Image (e.g. wire loc.)
Other
If "Other" is selected, please provide a reason in the text box below
QUALITYCHECK
Reprocess Mark each image already acquired to status and reason selected
2. Qualify the image as either Repeated or Rejected, then select the associated reason in the list
provided. If the reason chosen is Other, a text field is available to type in a customized reason.
To apply the same status and reason to all images already acquired, select the "Mark each image
already acquired to status and reason selected" check box.
Click the Save button: If Repeated or Rejected was selected, the interactive QUALITYCHECK
current level status now indicates QUALITYCHECK NOK.

Viewer
This new qualification level is applied to both images (raw and processed):
Repeat and Reject Confirmation
All images are marked Accepted by default if status is not changed by the user.
marked as Repeated
marked as Rejected
These %d images will not be deleted from AWS Database.

Image Qualification
According to Medical Preferences options selected in Quality Check panel
Repeated images will be AutoPushed will be AutoPrinted
Rejected images will be AutoPushed will be AutoPrinted
If you select Cancel, you will be able to manually Push or Print images before leaving the viewer.
Planned Auto Push and Auto Print
If you select Cancel, you will be able to change AutoPush and AutoPrint configuration for Repeated and
actions, as defined in Medical Rejected images in Medical Application Preferences, Quality check panel.
Application Preferences, Quality If you select OK, you will exit the viewer and images will be AutoPushed and AutoPrinted as configured
Check part.
OK Cancel
3. After all images are qualified as desired, close the examination. The Repeat and Reject Confirmation
dialog box appears before closing, summarizing the image qualification and the planned Auto Push
and Auto Print actions.
4. Once you agree with the content of the Repeat and Reject Confirmation dialog box, click the OK
button. The dialog box for the final exit then appears.

Viewer
4-5-2 Case 2: RRA disabled

4-5-2-1 Introduction
You can apply one of two qualification levels to an image: QUALITYCHECK OK or QUALITYCHECK
NOK, with the consequences on image transfer (Auto Push and Auto Print) as indicated in the table
below:
QUALITYCHECK current level status Consequence on Image Transfer

QUALITYCHECK OK Auto Print and/or Auto Push, according to settings in Medical
Application preferences window.
QUALITYCHECK NOK Auto Print/Auto Push functions do not operate.
4-5-2-2 Procedure to qualify an image

While viewing an image (raw or processed) in acquisition mode, the interactive QUALITYCHECK current
level status in the Viewer Function panel indicates the current level (QUALITYCHECK OK or
QUALITYCHECK NOK). Click the interactive current level status to toggle the image qualification
between the two possible levels (see illustration below). The new level is applied to both images (raw
and processed).
Display Parameters
Inv.. Standard
Click here to toggle current level status

QUALITYCHECK
Reprocess
4-6 Print
Click this button to print the displayed image. See Chapter 22 Printing.

Viewer
4-7 Middle Mouse button

Click one of the buttons on this panel to select one of three functions to be
performed by the middle mouse button. See below for descriptions of these
functions; the default is Contrast/Brightness control (WW/WL).
4-7-1 Magnifying glass
Provides a magnified view of part of the image in a moveable square zone.
If the initial zoom of the image is True Size, Fit to Screen or Zoom 1/2, zoom factor inside the magnifying
glass is 3, which corresponds to a full resolution display (each pixel on the screen corresponds to a pixel
on the Digital Detector).
If the initial zoom of the image is Zoom 1, zoom factor inside the magnifying glass is 6, which
corresponds to a double resolution display (a pixel on the digital detector appears on 4 pixels on the
screen).
• To select the magnifying glass function, click with the left mouse button on the
Magnifying glass button.
• To use the function, move the mouse pointer to the part of the view you are interested in;
press and hold the middle mouse button.
Note:
Any annotations or graphics in the magnified zone temporarily disappear.
4-7-2 Image scroll
When all of an image is not visible, for example when you have magnified an image by using the Zoom
function, this function allows you to move the visible window around the image.
• To select the image scroll function, click with the left mouse button on the Scroll button.
• To use the scroll function, move the mouse pointer onto the view; press and hold the middle
mouse button to move the image as required.
Note:
If the full content of the image is already displayed, the Image Scroll function has no effect.
4-7-3 Contrast/Brightness control
This function allows image contrast and brightness to be adjusted by moving the mouse.
• To select the contrast/brightness function, click with the left mouse button on the Contrast/
Brightness button.
• To use the contrast/brightness function, move the mouse pointer onto the view; press and
hold the middle mouse button:
- Contrast is controlled by a horizontal movement of the mouse, to the left for more contrast, and to
the right for less.
- Brightness is controlled by a vertical movement of the mouse, up to decrease brightness, and
down to increase it.
Note:
Image contrast and brightness can also be adjusted using the Contrast and Brightness sliders, or
the Auto Contrast control, all available from the View Control Panel.

Viewer
5 Scrapbook
WARNING
The Scrapbook function allows more than one image to be printed on a single film for ease of
comparison and reference. DO NOT use any images printed from the Scrapbook for diagnostic
purposes. Be aware that there is no consistency in size between small and large images printed
side by side from the scrapbook.
• The Scrapbook function allows you to select images and arrange them in any desired order for
printing, by positioning them on “virtual pages” in the Scrapbook. Pages can contain multiple images,
according to the layouts available with the currently selected printer, and each page can have a
different layout. Pages can be sent for printing individually or all at once.
• A “delete after print” option can be turned on or off, as required, which causes pages to be
automatically deleted after printing, when turned on.
• Only images from a single patient can be loaded into the Scrapbook at one time. Images may be
loaded from different exams; a warning appears when the first image of the new exam is loaded.
• To use the function, either click the Scrapbook button on the Viewer Control Panel (see section 5-
2 Scrapbook functions on page 174) or press the <F3> keyboard function button. The Scrapbook
window appears:
Layout Formats: Use these buttons to select the format desired for the
current page. See 5-1 Layout formats on page 174.
Scrapbook functions: Use these buttons to select Scrapbook functions; Print,

Print Menu, Options Menu, and Delete Menu. See 5-2 Scrapbook functions
on page 174.
Composer area: This area shows the contents of the current Scrapbook
page. It is divided into slots for images, according to the selected layout for
the page. Use this area to add and remove Scrapbook images. See 5-
3 Composer area on page 175.
Page navigation area: Use the arrows to display the next or previous pages.
See 5-4 Page navigation area on page 175.
Printer information area: Shows the current printer settings.
Close button: Use this button to close and empty the Scrapbook. If the
Scrapbook contains unprinted images, a warning dialog box asks for
confirmation of the Close action.

Viewer
5-1 Layout formats

Layout Formats. Four Operator-defined buttons show available formats for
page layouts. These are usually: 2 x 2, 1 x 2, 2 x 1, and 1 x 1.
Select the format desired for the current page by clicking on the appropriate
button.
• If the currently selected printer has been configured to allow more than four layouts, the additional
layouts can be selected in two ways:
- Click the fifth (rightmost) button to display a menu of all page layouts available for the current
printer; select the desired layout from the menu to apply it to the current page.
- The Operator-defined buttons can be reprogrammed to select different layouts; see Options
Menu in section 5-2 Scrapbook functions on page 174.
5-2 Scrapbook functions
Print
Click this button to print all pages of the Scrapbook.
Print Menu
Click this button to display a menu of print options:
• Print page: Prints the contents of the current Scrapbook page.
• Print all pages: Prints all pages of the Scrapbook.
• Printing status: Displays the Printing status panel (see Chapter 22 Printing).
• Printer Configuration: Displays the Print Manager panel.
Options Menu
Click this button to display a two-line pull-down menu:
• Select Options to display a checkbox which allows you to enable or disable the
“delete after print” option. Options
• Select Layout Preferences to display a menu of all page layouts available for the Layout Preferences
current printer. To reprogram one of the Operator-defined layout buttons

(section 5-1 Layout formats on page 174), select the desired format and apply it to the button by
“drag and drop”.
Delete Menu
Click this button to display a two-line pull-down menu:
• Select Delete Page to remove the current page from the Scrapbook.
• Select Delete All Pages to remove all pages from the Scrapbook. Delete Page
Delete All Pages

Viewer
5-3 Composer area

This area displays the image or images held on the current Scrapbook page in thumbnail (reduced size)
form. Each thumbnail displays the full image, with the same settings (brightness, contrast, invert, rotate,
and flip) and the same graphic annotations as the image displayed in the Viewer. However the Zoom
and the position of the image if it has been roamed in the Viewer are not taken into account, either for
display or when printing.
Use the area to add and remove Scrapbook images:
• Use the right mouse button to “drag and drop” an image from the Mosaic Image Browser to an empty
slot on a Scrapbook page displayed in the Composer area.
• Press the keyboard function key <F4> to load the image currently displayed in the Viewer into the
next free slot of the current page of the Scrapbook. If there is no free slot, a new empty page is
created and displayed, with the same layout format as the current page.
If the Scrapbook is not open, the <F4> key has no effect. If the mouse cursor is left over the
Scrapbook window, the <F4> key has no effect.
• To remove an individual image from the Scrapbook, click with the right mouse button on the
thumbnail image in the composer area, and answer Yes to the delete confirmation dialog box which
appears.
5-4 Page navigation area

• This area displays the current page number and the total number of pages
in the Scrapbook, and contains two navigation arrows:
• Click the left arrow to display the contents of the previous page; if the
current page is the first page, a warning message appears.
• Click the right arrow to display the next page. If the current page is the last one, a new empty page is
created and displayed, with the same layout format as the current page.

Viewer

Image processing and display
Chapter 21 Image processing and display
1 Raw image
After making an exposure, the image acquired by the Digital Detector is automatically transferred to the
workstation, added to the exam and displayed on the Viewer screen as a raw image with low contrast.
During the transfer of the raw image all Operator interface functions are disabled.
• Fine View processing is applied to the raw image.
This increases the sharpness of the image. Although Fine View processing is applied before the
raw image is saved and displayed, the effect is not visible at this stage, because the raw image
appears with low contrast.
Note:
Fine View processing can be deselected for Quality Control purposes, However, it must always be
selected for clinical images. If Fine View is not selected, a warning message appears when starting
an exam.
The raw image is saved in the DICOM MG “for processing” format so that processing can be carried out
later if required, perhaps using a hospital-specific algorithm.
2 Processing
After acquisition, a number of calculations are applied to the image to create the processed image, which
then replaces the raw image on the screen of the AWS.
The main calculations that are applied to create the processed image are:
• Collimator Detection
This applies a black mask around the useful image area, covering areas which would otherwise be
white. It allows more comfortable viewing.
• Pseudo-log Transformation
This transformation facilitates the manipulation of brightness and contrast during the review. After
the transformation the image dynamic range is reduced to 12 bits, without loss of clinical information.
• Auto-contrast.
This improves image quality by optimizing the levels of brightness (window level) and contrast
(window width) in the image.
• Thickness Equalization or Premium View
Either Thickness Equalization or Premium View processing is applied, according to the setting of the
Premium View option in Medical Application preferences (see Medical Application preferences on
page 129):
- Thickness Equalization.
To apply Thickness Equalization processing, set the Premium View option to Disable.
Subcutaneous tissues can be difficult to see on the screen because of monitor display limitations.
This is corrected by applying a thickness equalization algorithm to decrease the image dynamic
range. Image information beyond a threshold level of gray, selected to correspond to
subcutaneous tissues, is modified for more visibility. The end result is clear visibility of the
medical information in all regions of the breast. When this algorithm is used, the processing
description applied is referred to as PROC_1_FV (or PROC_1 if Fine View is not applied).
The Thickness Equalization algorithm is not applied to the following images:
- Magnified, Spot, and Collimated views with a Field of View smaller than 19.2 cm x 23 cm.
Image-process-and-display.fm Page no. 177 Chapter 21

- Images with certain combinations of manually selected parameters.The processing

description applied to these images, when the thickness equalization algorithm is not used, is
referred to as PROC0_FV, or PROC_0 if Fine View is not applied.
- Premium View
To apply Premium View processing, set the Premium View option to Enable. If the Premium View
strength selection feature is enabled, select the preferred strength for local contrast enhancement
(High setting for a higher local contrast and Low setting for a lower local contrast). See section
Medical Application preferences on page 129 for more details on how to select the strength.
The Premium View image-processing algorithm increases the visibility of breast structures. Its
main advantage is to provide a single breast image, in which the contrast in the fatty tissues is
similar to that obtained by setting WW (window width) and WL (window level) for optimum
visualization of fatty tissues, and the contrast in the fibro-glandular tissue is similar to that
obtained by setting WW and WL for optimal visualization of fibro-glandular tissues. The Premium
View algorithm also includes a thickness equalization algorithm to enhance the visibility of
subcutaneous tissues. Under certain specific conditions (for example, particular exposure
techniques) the Premium View algorithm cannot be applied.
The processing description applied is referred to as PREMIUM_VIEW_FV if Fine View has been
applied, (or PREMIUM_VIEW if Fine View has not been applied).
If the optional PVi implant feature is enabled and "Implant present" flag has been set to "Yes" in
the Medical Procedure card (see Medical Procedure Card on page 143), PVi processing will
automatically be applied to all the images of this patient whatever strength is selected in Medical
Application preferences.
Note:
Premium View is an image processing algorithm optimized for the structure of breast images.
When imaging an object with thick or sharp borders (for example, a phantom), one might see an
enhanced brightness at the border of the object. This enhancement is normal and is not expected
to affect correct phantom scoring.
Note:
When imaging breasts with implants, the Premium View algorithm output may not be optimal. In
this case, a satisfactory image display may be obtained by adjusting window level and window
width, or by using the thickness equalization algorithm to reprocess the raw image. See section
Reprocess on page 167.
Note:
When acquiring images with Spot paddle in Mag mode or in Contact mode, the Premium View
algorithm output may not be optimal. In this case, a satisfactory image display may be obtained by
adjusting window level and window width.
Chapter 21 Page no. 178 Image-process-and-display.fm

3 Processed image
• After application of the selected algorithm(s), the processed image is added to the exam and
replaces the raw image on the AWS screen.
• Processed images are saved in the DICOM MG “for presentation” format, ready for review.
4 Image display
4-1 Processed image presentation
• By default, the processed image appears with the Standard contrast level,
• Options in the Viewer Control Panel window allow the default display level to be changed, by
selection of High, Low, Standard, or User levels. For images to which Premium View has been
applied, selection of the User level has the effect of selecting the Standard level, but a Operator level
can be set if the image is saved with modified levels.
4-2 Image display format
Image size (raw or processed) Number of pixels displayed

24 x 31 2394 x 3062
19 x 23 1914 x 2294
5 Next exposure
As soon as the processed image has been transferred and displayed on the screen, the system is ready
for the next exposure. The images (first raw, then processed) from the new exposure replace the
previous image in the Viewer.
Image-process-and-display.fm Page no. 179 Chapter 21

Chapter 21 Page no. 180 Image-process-and-display.fm

Printing
Chapter 22 Printing
1 Printing conditions
1-1 Potential printers
Any GE-recommended, high resolution, DICOM printer can be connected to the Senographe Essential
for printing hard copies of digital images. For compatible printers, see the latest product data sheets for
this system, which you can obtain from your local sales Representative.
1-2 Film sizes

• Small images (19 x 23 cm) can be printed to both 8 x 10 and 10 x 12 inch film.
• Large images (24 x 31 cm) can only be printed to 10 x 12 inch film.
WARNING
Only films formatted to print a single mammogram per sheet of film may be used for diagnostic
purposes, and only images printed to 10 x 12 inch film or small images printed to 8 x 10 inch film
have been validated for diagnostic purposes. Do NOT use films formatted to print multiple images
per sheet of film for diagnostic purposes.
1-3 Types of images which may be printed

Although both raw and processed images can be printed, only processed images should be sent for
printing by the Senographe Essential, and only one image per film is available unless Scrapbook is
configured and used.
1-4 Information which is not printed

Modifications made to the image (other than window width and window level) are not printed.
1-5 Printing scale
WARNING
The size of the printed mammogram depends on which printing method is used to print the film.
Use the following table for guidance. The reduction in size is given with the Image True Size as
the reference.
Relative Sizes of Printed Mammograms From Acquisition Workstations

Workstation Printing Method Linear Size Comparison
AWS Automatic or Manual Print The reduction in size depends upon the
Print Models 1, 2, 3, and 4. make and model of printer, and the Print
Model in use. Refer to the following table.
print.fm Page no. 181 Chapter 22

Printing
Note:
Use of Print Model 3 when printing to 10” x 12” film results in a significant image reduction as
compared with use of Print Model 4 (refer to the table below). We therefore advise the use of Print
Model 4 as a default print model, rather than Print Model 3.
Workstation: AWS AGFA Carestream FUJI KODAK KONICA
Print Image Film DryStar AXYS DryView DryPix DryView DryView DryPro
Model size size 4500M 5850 4000 8900 6800 793
5500 5000
5503 7000
Model 1 SFOV 8x10" 0.2% 1.1% 0.8% 4.0% 3.3% 4.0% 3.5%
SFOV 10x12" 3.7% 4.5% 3.9% 3.7% 2.4% 3.1% 3.9%
LFOV 10x12" 4.0% 4.6% 3.9% 3.7% 2.7% 3.7% 3.7%
Model 2 SFOV 8x10" 0.2% 0.8% 0.8% 4.0% 3.3% 4.0% 3.5%
SFOV 10x12" 3.9% 4.6% 3.9% 3.7% 2.4% 3.1% 3.9%
LFOV 10x12" 4.0% 4.8% 3.9% 3.7% 2.7% 3.7% 3.7%
Model 3 SFOV 8x10" 4.1% 4.1% 3.7% 3.3% 1.3% 1.5% 1.8%
SFOV 10x12" 9.1% 9.4% 9.6% 7.6% 8.1% 8.6% 9.1%
LFOV 10x12" 9.5% 9.4% 9.4% 7.6% 7.7% 8.6% 9.4%
Model 4 SFOV 8x10" 4.3% 4.1% 3.7% 3.7% 1.3% 1.5% 1.5%
SFOV 10x12" 4.2% 3.9% 4.9% 3.7% 2.8% 3.1% 3.9%
LFOV 10x12" 4.3% 3.9% 4.8% 3.7% 2.7% 3.7% 3.7%
1-6 Printing process

Printing is very simple. You can use the Auto Print function for automatic printing of newly acquired
images on the closure of an exam, or manual printing to print individual images from the Viewer window.
2 Printer management
Printers are set up and declared to the system at the time of installation by your GE Service
Representative; printer information cannot be changed by the Operator.
The access to this function is from the Tools menu .
Chapter 22 Page no. 182 print.fm

Printing
3 Print functions
3-1 Auto Print
Auto Print is a function allowing the Operator to automatically initiate the printing of exam images on
closure of the exam from the AWS.
Images with a Quality Check value of OK are automatically printed by the Auto Print function.
If RRA is installed and enabled, the printing of images with a Quality Check value of NOT OK depends
on Quality Check settings in Medical Application preferences (see subheading 8-3-5 Quality Check on
page 132 in section 8-3 Medical Application preferences on page 129 of Chapter 17 Browser).
If RRA is not installed or disabled, images with a Quality Check value of NOT OK are not automatically
printed at the close of the exam.
To use Auto Print, open the Tools menu from the Browser (see Chapter 17 Browser), and select Medical
Application preferences. Click the Auto Print button in the Medical Application preferences window to
access the Auto Print set-up tool.
Facilities available from the Auto Print window are:
• DICOM printers: contains the list of all the available DICOM printers that have been declared for
printing. Click a printer in the list to select it.
• Review Rooms: contains the list of all environmental conditions of available review rooms. Select the
room corresponding to the printer. Refer to your GE Service Representative or printer manufacturer
for review room configuration.
• Auto Print buttons: click the On button to turn Auto Print on for the selected printer or the Off button to
turn it off. The selected button becomes dark gray.
• Save button: click this button to confirm any changes made and close the window.
• Close button: click this button to close the Medical Application preferences window. If the Operator
has made changes to the Auto Print window, a warning window opens requesting the Operator to
use one of the following:
- Save button (to save the changes and return to the Browser).
- Cancel button (to cancel changes made, close the warning window and return to the Auto Print
window).
- Discard button (to close without saving the changes and return to the Browser).
• Print mode: only Fit to Film. Can not be changed by the Operator in current AWS software release.
• Film size: either automatically selected according to image size or always 8 x 10" or always 10 x 12".
(See section 8-3-2 Auto Print on page 130). When selecting Automatic for film size, if the printer
takes only 8 x 10" film, a dialog box opens informing the Operator that large images will not be
printed.
When the Auto Print is performed at the close of the exam, if the printer provides only 8 x 10 inch
films and if there are large images in the exam to be printed, a dialog box opens informing the
Operator that large images cannot be printed.
• Number of Copies box: enter the required number of copies in this box.
• Printer properties button: click this button to open the Printer properties window (see section 3-
3 Printer properties on page 185).

Printing
3-2 Manual Print

In addition to the Auto Print function, an image displayed on the Viewer screen can be printed at any
time under manual control.
Click the Print button in the Viewer Function panel to open the Print Request window.
Print Request
DICOM printers Review Rooms Print mode Fit to Film
PRINTER 1 My Room1
PRINTER 2 My Room2
PRINTER 3
Number Of Copies (1.. 9)
Printer Properties ...
Print Queue Save Cancel
Facilities available from the Print Request window are:

• DICOM printers: contains the list of all the available DICOM printers that have been declared for
printing. Click a printer in the list to select it.
• Review Rooms: contains the list of all environmental conditions of available review rooms. Select the
room corresponding to the printer. Refer to your GE Service Representative or printer manufacturer
for review room configuration.
• Print mode: cannot be changed. Fit to Film only.
• Number of Copies box: enter the required number of copies in this box.
• Printer Properties ... button: click this button to open the Printing Properties window (see section 3-
3 Printer properties on page 185).
• Print button: click this button to print the displayed image on the currently selected printer and close
the window. Any changes made, apart from film size, are saved.
• Queue button: click this button to open the Filming Queue window (see section 3-5 Filming queue on
page 186).
• Save button: click this button to confirm any changes made and close the window.
• Cancel button: click this button to cancel any changes made and close the window.
If the Operator tries to print a large (24 x 31) image to 8 x 10" film, a dialog box opens informing the user
that this operation is not possible.

Printing
3-3 Printer properties

This window is accessed from either the Auto Print Printer properties
window, the Print Request window, or the Scrapbook Print
Manager panel. It displays the properties set for the PRINTER 2
selected printer.
Format: Standard (512)
• Format and Magnification type cannot be changed with
the current Senographe Essential release software.
Media type: Blue film
• Media type: Blue film must be selected by default with
Senographe Essential. Other choices will cause
Destination: Processor
printing errors.
• Destination: Processor must be selected by default
Film orientation: Portrait
when using Senographe Essential. Other choices will
incur printing errors. Magnification type: Cubic
• Film orientation: Portrait must be selected by default
when usingSenographe Essential. Other choices will Film size: 8 in x 10 in
incur printing errors.
OK Save
Note:
The user does not need to change any value here to set the Auto Print function. Film size value
indicated in Printer properties panel is the film size used for the last printing, which may have been
an auto-print or a manual print. If Auto Print is set to ON, at exam closure, the film size value that
will be considered for the Auto Print is the one of Auto Print tab. The film size value of Printer
Properties panel will be erased and replaced by the film size value set in Auto Print tab.
3-4 Printing status

The Printing status window displays the status of the Printing status
requested printing jobs.
• If a job shows the OK comment, the exam has
PRINTER 1 (10) ABORTED
successfully been sent to printing. If the job shows the
PRINTER 2 (11) OK
ABORTED comment, the job has been aborted
manually by the Operator from the menu window
buttons.
• Click the Queue button to open the Filming Queue
window (see section 3-5 Filming queue on page 186).
OK Queue

Printing
3-5 Filming queue

This window is accessed by clicking the Queue button in the
Queue
Print Request window or the Printing status window.
It displays a list of jobs in the print queue, allowing the DICOM printer
Operator to check that print jobs have been successfully
sent to the printer. Note that a local printer problem can
PRINTER 1 (10) Active
prevent a job from being printed, even if it is successfully
PRINTER 2 (11) Pending
sent to the printer. If any communication problems are
observed with the printer or network, the Operator is able to PRINTER 3 (12) Paused
Refresh, Pause, Resume, or Clear jobs listed in the Queue.
Pause Resume Clear
OK Refresh
3-6 Print annotation models

When printing images to film, four models of annotation layout are available. They differ in the position
and type of annotation information to be printed. See section 3-2 Annotation Level on page 161 in
Chapter 20 Viewer.
Note:
Only the annotation models shown below as Model 3 and Model 4 contain the information required
by the Quality Mammography Standards of the MQSA. Only Model 3 and Model 4 position the
patient, institution, operator, and exposure data in a film footer or margin to avoid overlap of the
annotations with the image.
Select the model to be used in the Medical Application preferences Annotations panel (see Chapter 17
Browser).
The illustrations below show the four models. In each case the model is illustrated by a view with the
chest wall to the right.
Note:
Image size and FOV size are symbolized by [ ] and #, respectively. Image processing displayed
(PROC_0, PROC_1, etc.) is described in section 3-1 Annotation Content on page 160 in
Chapter 20 Viewer.)
3-6-1 FB view exception
On the AWS, the View and Laterality indication is placed in the lower part of the monitor.
Most images of the breast are presented with the axillary region in the upper part of the monitor. The FB
(From Below) views are presented in deviation to this practice and have the axillary region in the lower
part of the monitor.
As a result of a software enhancement that provides consistency among all views in images printed to
film, the axillary region of FB views is now placed near the upper part of the film. To indicate that an FB
view film printout has the benefit of this enhancement, its laterality annotation (L or R) is printed in italics.
- For detailed information about FB view exception, see section 1-1-1 FB view exception on page 154.

Printing
Print annotation Model 1:
Model 1:
Institution, physician, Operator, and patient
data at top, followed by view data.
Image and exposure data at bottom.
Top and bottom annotation areas are aligned
to the border opposite the chest wall.
This model does NOT contain all of the
information required by the Mammography
Quality Standards Act (MQSA).

Printing
Model 2:
Patient data at top, followed by view data.
Institution, Operator, image and exposure data
at bottom.
Top and bottom annotation areas are aligned
to the border opposite the chest wall.
This model does NOT contain all of the
information required by the Mammography
Quality Standards Act (MQSA).

Printing
Model 3:
View data at top, followed by exposure date
and time.
Patient data at bottom left, image data at
bottom middle, institution and Operator data at
bottom right, followed by exposure data.
The top annotation area is aligned to the
border opposite the chest wall. All bottom
annotations are restricted to the image footer
so as to avoid overlap with the image.
This model contains the information required
by the Mammography Quality Standards Act
(MQSA).
WARNING
Large (24 x 31) images printed using Print annotation Model 3 must not be used for final
interpretation.

Printing
Print annotation Model 4 for 19 x 23 (8" x 10") film:
Model 4 for 19 x 23 (8" x 10") film:

and time.
Patient data at bottom left, image data at
bottom middle, institution and Operator data at
bottom right, followed by exposure data.
border opposite the chest wall. All bottom
annotations are restricted to the image footer
so as to avoid overlap with the image.
(MQSA).

Printing
Print annotation Model 4 for 24 x 31 (10" x 12") - film (view with chest wall to the left):
Model 4 for 24 x 31 (10" x 12") film

and time.
Patient, image, institution, Operator, and
exposure data are printed vertically opposite
the chest wall side of the film.
border opposite the chest wall. All vertically
printed annotations are restricted to an area
outside the image so as to avoid overlap with
breast tissue.
(MQSA).

Printing
Print annotation Model 4 for 24 x 31 (10" x 12") - film (view with chest wall to the right):
Model 4 for 24 x 31 (10" x 12") film

View data at top, followed by exposure
date and time.
Patient, image, institution, Operator, and
exposure data are printed vertically
opposite the chest wall side of the film.
border opposite the chest wall. All
vertically printed annotations are
restricted to an area outside the image
so as to avoid overlap with breast tissue.
This model contains the information
required by the Mammography Quality
Standards Act (MQSA).

Interchange media
Chapter 23 Interchange media
1 Overview
The interchange media function provides a compact disk recording (CD-R) drive, installed inside the
Control Station (see illustrations below).
Access to CD reader/recorder drive.

For interchange media usage by the Operator. Referred to as CD-R or
CDR elsewhere in this manual.
Also used by service.
Illustration 1 Access to CD Drive

The interchange media function allows you to save and restore image data using standard or mini
recordable compact disks (DICOM data format). Images saved in this way may, for example, be passed
to another radiologist for a second opinion.
CAUTION
The interchange media function is NOT recommended for permanent archiving.

GE does not guarantee the suitability of the media for such purposes.
The presence of the CD-R function is indicated by an icon in the Network panel of the
Browser window (upper left corner).
CDR
• An icon appears below each of the lists in the Browser. These icons may be turned off and
on in the Browser preferences window, accessed through the Tools menu, see Chapter 17 Browser.
cdrom.fm Page no. 193 Chapter 23

Interchange media
2 Using the interchange media

Recordable CDs are considerably more sensitive to damage than the conventional CD-ROMs that you
may be familiar with. Respect the handling instructions below.
2-1 Handling recordable CD media

! Notice:
To avoid image loss, never touch the recordable surface of a recordable CD (CD-R). Handle the
disk only by the outer edge. Do not place it face down on a hard surface. Fingerprints or scratches
will make the disk unusable.
Before usage, verify that the CD-R surface has no visible scratches. If there are any scratches, do
NOT use the CD-R.
• Store the CD-R in its protective case. Proper storage helps protect the data from damage due to
scratches on the CD-R surface.
• Do not leave the CD-R in direct sunlight or in a hot, humid environment. These conditions can warp
and damage the disk.
• Use only a felt tip permanent pen when labeling. Write only on the printed area or on the clear inner
diameter of the disk. Never use a ballpoint or hard point writing tool as it may damage the disk. Do
not use adhesive labels.
• Use a soft, lint-free cloth to remove spots, dust, or fingerprints from the disk. Always wipe from the
center to the outside edge of the disk. Never wipe the disk in a circular motion.
• Do not use any chemical-based cleaners. These can damage the disk.
2-2 Saving images on recordable CD
CAUTION
GE recommend the use of CD-R media that have been officially validated for performance and
reliability of patient data interchange on the Senographe Essential system. These are identified
by GE labelling. GE cannot take responsibility for any data loss or incompatibility with other
systems resulting from the use of unsupported media.
To order compatible media, contact your GE local sales Representative.
- A recordable CD (CD-R) can only be recorded once.
- When saving image data on a CD-R, you must always use a blank CD-R.
2-2-1 Procedure
All image data that you want to save on a given CD-R must be selected beforehand, and will be saved in
a single pass. It is not possible to add data on a CD-R.
• Push the eject button under the tray on the CD-R drive. When the tray opens insert a new (blank)
recordable CD into the CD-R drive (see section 2-1 Handling recordable CD media on page 194 on
how to handle recordable CDs) and close the drive by pushing the button again. Wait for 40 seconds
for the CD-R drive to be ready (when the light on CD-R drive stops blinking).
• On the Browser, select the patient or patients to be saved in the same manner as selecting images
for review (click the required patient name in the Browser list; to select multiple patients, hold down
the <Control> key and click successively on each required patient name).
Chapter 23 Page no. 194 cdrom.fm

Interchange media
• Use the middle mouse button to drag the selected patient(s) to the CD-R icon in the Network
panel,
CDR
Or:
• Click the Push button below the patient list on the Browser (if the icon is not present, it may
be turned on by accessing Browser preferences from the Tools menu). A window opens to
show a list of available recording devices.
• Select the CD-R read/write device by clicking on its name in the displayed Save selected exam(s) on...
list, then click the OK button. If the Preview of CD-R content has been set List of devices
(see 2-2-2 Preview option on page 195) a list of data to be recorded on the CDR read/write
CD-R appears.
After about 15 minutes a message appears, indicating how much of the
CD-R capacity will be used.
• Click the Write button to start the operation, or on the Cancel button to
cancel it.
List of devices
CDR read/write
OK Cancel
Note:
While selecting items (before you start the save), the operation can be abandoned by
clicking on the CD-R icon and selecting Detach in the drop-down menu. This stops the
operation. The CD is ejected automatically and can be used again. CDR
Query
2-2-2 Preview option
Option
After clicking on the OK button or after using “drag-and-drop” to start recording, but before Detach
saving starts, the Preview of CD-R content automatically displays a list of the patients which
will fit on the CD-R, and the estimated time required. Note that the list may not be in the order selected
by the Operator, and that it cannot be assumed that all patients selected for recording will fit.
At this stage, you can still cancel the save operation and modify your selection if required.
• To set this option on or off, click the CDR icon in the Network/Archive panel on the main
Browser and select Option in the drop-down menu.
CDR
Query
Option
Detach

Interchange media
2-2-3 Checking the CD-R

You are recommended to check for successful completion by browsing the CD-R at the end of the save
operation.
• To do so, click the CDR icon on the main Browser, then select Query in the drop-down menu. If all
the patients selected for the save operation are not displayed on the Media Browser an error has
occurred while recording the CD, and you will have to repeat the save operation.
• An error message appears next to the patient name if the associated information has not been
saved. If this occurs:
- Make a list of the patients correctly saved and those with an error.
- Insert a new CD-R and repeat the save process.
- If there are still errors, consult your GE Service Representative.
2-2-4 System not available while writing to CD-R
No other operation can be performed on the system while saving images on a CD-R. For a full CD-R the
save operation can take up to 25 minutes. Burning of CD-Rs could therefore be done before or after
patient imaging or be pushed to a review workstation and burned from the review workstation.
2-2-5 Errors
If a problem occurs, an error message appears:
• The following message may appear during preparation for saving files; it needs specific action:
Save selection exceeds CD capacity. Save aborted.
Explanation: You have selected more patient files than can be stored on a single CD-R.
Action: Select fewer patients or fewer exams to be saved on the CD-R.
• If a problem occurs during the save process, the error message Save failed appears.
First check that the blank recordable CD is correctly inserted in the CD-R tray, and the tray is fully
closed.
If the items above are correct, an error has occurred while recording the CD, and you will have to
repeat the save operation using a new blank CD.

Interchange media
2-3 Restoring images from recordable CD

You can restore and review images from CDs that were recorded either on the same or on another
Senographe system.
2-3-1 Procedure
• Check that there is enough space on the AWS disk system to accommodate the images being
restored (refer to the used disk space display on the main Browser).
• Insert the CD containing the images into the CD-R drive (see section 2-1 Handling recordable CD
media on page 194 for handling precautions).
• Click the CDR icon in the Network panel on the main Browser and select Query in the
drop-down menu to open the Media Browser.
CDR
Query
Option
Detach
Return to Browser button Refresh button Tools menu button
Media Browser CDR
Quit button
Media Browser CDR (04:01 PM) Status line
Sort by Number Sort by Number
examination list
1/4 examinations Sort by button above

patient list Sort by Number each list
image list
1/16 Patients 1/2 series

Restore button under
each list
serie list
• In the Media Browser window, select the patient(s) and/or exam(s) to be restored in the same
manner as on the main Browser (see Chapter 17 Browser).
• Sort the lists as required using the Sort by buttons.
• After selecting the desired patient, exam, series or image item(s):
- With the cursor on the selection, press and hold the middle mouse button and drag the selection
directly onto the Return to Browser button at top left.
Or
- Click the corresponding Restore button (if the icon is not present, it may be turned on by
accessing Browser preferences from the Tools menu).

Interchange media
The selected items are copied from the CD-R to the AWS database.
• Click the Return to Browser button to return to the main Browser.

• See section 2-4 Ejecting a disk from the CD-R drive on page 198 on how to eject the CD-R from the
CD-R drive after the restore operation.
Note:
During the restore, no other operations are possible on the AWS.
When a patient name already exists in the AWS database, any exams being restored from the CD
for that patient are appended to the existing exams.
2-3-2 Errors
• When restoring files, the operation is halted if there is not enough space on the AWS disk system to
restore the selected items (patients or exams).
You can repeat the operation after freeing AWS disk system space by deleting some patients that
have already been saved.
2-3-3 Notes
• The contents of the Media Browser are up-to-date when the Media Browser is first opened.
However, changes (such as after a save operation) are not displayed automatically. Click
the Refresh button to update the Browser lists. The time of the latest refresh appears on the
status line.
• The Media Browser Tools menu contains the Application Management menu item. This
item is for use of GE service only.
• The Main Browser and Media Browser display the same columns of information in the Patients,
examinations, series and images lists. However, some of these columns may be empty in the Media
Browser. The full information will be displayed in the Main Browser after the images have been
restored.
2-4 Ejecting a disk from the CD-R drive

As soon as the CD-R drive has been accessed for a save or restore operation, it is locked, and you can
no longer eject the disk by means of the eject button on the front of the drive.
You must first perform a Detach operation:
• Click the storage device icon in the Main Browser and select Detach in the drop-down
menu.
CDR
• If the disk is not ejected automatically, press the eject button.
Query
• If Detach appears in grey and no save or restore operation is in progress, the archive Option
device is already unlocked. Press the eject button to open the drive. Detach
If a fault occurs (for example trying to start a restore operation with a blank disk in the drive),
the Detach operation is performed automatically, and the disk is ejected.
! Notice:
Never press the eject button on the CD-R drive while a save or restore operation is in progress.

2D Localization examination
Chapter 24 2D Localization examination

The 2D Cross-hair option is provided for use with the Senographe Essential System. It includes a 2D
Cross-hair device and 2D localization paddles, intended to be used together with the face shield.
1 Face shield and 2D Cross-hair device

1-1 Description
Face shield Face shield with 2D Cross-hair device
• The face shield is used to keep the patient’s face, hair, ear lobes, etc. out of the X-ray beam during
exposure.
• The 2D Cross-hair device includes metallic wires which may be positioned in the field of view as
required. It is used during manual biopsy procedures, to target a position for the introduction of a
needle or to position a marker for a tangential view. Manual control knobs allow the wires to be
moved on the X and Y axes.
Metallic wires
Control knobs
2D-Localization.fm Page no. 199 Chapter 24

1-2 Mounting instructions

The face shield and 2D Cross-hair device can be easily mounted and removed as required.
• The face shield is mounted by sliding it into the front interface plate rails, from the front of the X-ray
tube head.
Face shield insertion:
• The 2D Cross-hair device is mounted by sliding it into the rear interface plate rails, from the rear of
the X-ray tube head.
2D Cross-hair device insertion:
CAUTION
The Face shield and the 2D Cross-hair device must be removed before installing the
Magnification stand. The face shield must always be mounted from the front, never from the rear.
The rear rails are intended for mounting the 2D Cross-hair device only. Make sure that the face
shield and the 2D Cross-hair device are pushed all the way onto the rails: you must hear a click
and feel a mechanical stop.
Chapter 24 Page no. 200 2D-Localization.fm

2 2D Localization examination procedures

2-1 Safety recommendations
WARNING
Elevation and rotation movements are enabled when the displayed compression force is less
than 3 daN. Where possible, make sure the compression force is greater than 3 daN before
starting the biopsy. If compression less than 3 daN must be used (for example, if the patient has
a sore breast or an implant), great care must be taken to avoid unwanted Gantry movements,
and AOP cannot be used.
CAUTION
Ensure that the footswitches are placed so that the patient cannot reach them and release the
compression during positioning or imaging.
CAUTION
If the patient moves during the biopsy procedure or compression thickness changes, the
procedure should be started again from the beginning in order to guarantee the accuracy of the
biopsy.
WARNING
Always bear in mind the needle's height and insert it to a depth such that it will not pierce through
the breast and touch the Bucky. This way you will avoid unwanted lesions and damage to the
Bucky.
2-2 Preparation
• Insert the face-shield and the 2D Cross-hair device (see section 1-2 Mounting instructions on
page 200). Use the X and Y manual control knobs as necessary to be sure that the cross wires are
positioned out of the field of view.
• Insert a biopsy paddle (2D large localization paddle or 2D spot localization paddle):
2D large localization paddle 2D spot localization paddle
• The biopsy procedure can be performed at all angles, but the angle used must be chosen to provide
the shortest possible distance for the needle from the skin to the lesion.
• For views that do not require the patient to stand, the patient must be seated in a biopsy chair; the
chair must provide good support to the patient’s back and arms. An optional biopsy chair is available
from GE.

• It is suggested to turn off the Auto Push and Auto Print features in Medical Application preferences.
• At the control console, turn off Auto decompression (menu Medical/DECOMP/DECOMP/NO).
• Compress the patient’s breast. Make sure that the region of interest (target or suspicious area) is
located in the center of the graduated window of the biopsy paddle.
2-3 Definitions
Physical and electronic Cross-hairs:
The X-ray image of this crossed wires superposed on the Breast image will be named "physical
Cross- hairs" in the rest of this chapter, to distinguish it from the "electronic Cross-hairs" that can be
displayed on the image on the monitor, as explained in section 2-3 2D Loc. - electronic Cross-hairs on
page 158.
Physical Cross-hairs images:
X-ray image: making an exposure.
Light image: turning on the Collimator light.
Target:
Target is the object in the breast which is to be sampled with a needle.
Insertion point:
Entry point for the needle on the skin of the breast.
Image target:
X-ray image of the target.
2-4 Acquisition procedure

• Make sure that the patient’s head is out of the light field.
• Acquire an image. See section 5 Examination: acquire the 1st image on page 76.
• Leave the breast under compression.
• In the Viewer, click the 2D Loc. icon to display a set of electronic cross hairs on the monitor
image. This icon is enabled in acquisition mode only.
• Use the trackball or mouse to position the intersection of the electronic Cross-hairs over the center of
the target (see the instructions given in section 2-3 2D Loc. - electronic Cross-hairs on page 158).
• On the monitor, read the relative position of the graduations on the biopsy paddle (X and Y axes).
Use Zoom 1, Zoom 1/2 or Fit to Screen as required for the best visualization of the area. If the
graduations can not be seen in the zoomed view after the electronic cross hairs have been
positioned, reduce the zoom to display the graduations.
• Use the knobs on the 2D Cross-hair device to move the wires into the correct alphanumeric position.
The goal is to superpose the image of the physical Cross-hairs with the electronic Cross-hair.
• If needed, perform another acquisition to verify the correct position of the physical Cross-hair.
• To insert the needle, first anesthetize the insertion point if required. Turn on the Collimator light, then
place the needle tip at the intersection of the shadow of the cross wires at skin level and insert the
needle.
• With the needle in place, make sure that the shadow of the cross wires coincides with the hub of the
needle.
• Use the knobs on the 2D Cross-hair device to move the cross wires out of the field of view.
• Perform another acquisition to verify correct needle position.
• Use the manual compression knobs to decompress slowly and carefully.

• Remove the fenestrated biopsy paddle and install a non-biopsy paddle.

• Support the breast and turn the Arm through 90 degrees.
• Perform another acquisition to check for correct depth.
• When the correct needle depth or hook wire position is obtained, release the patient.
2-5 Completion
• The images can now be annotated and/or measurements can be applied.
• Click the print icon to print each required image.
• Push the images to the Seno Advantage Workstation.
• In Medical Application preferences, turn Auto Push and Auto Print on or off as required.
• At the control console, turn Auto decompression back on for routine mammography.
3 Cleaning and disinfection

• Refer to the instructions for Cleaning and Disinfection given in Chapter 25 System Hygiene. Do not
immerse the 2D Cross-hair device or face shield in a solution or other liquid.


System Hygiene
Chapter 25 System Hygiene
1 Introduction
This chapter describes cleaning requirements that must be performed regularly to maintain hygienic
condition of the Senographe equipment.
WARNING
Adequate cleaning and disinfection is necessary to prevent disease transmission. Be sure to
thoroughly clean and disinfect equipment surfaces that contact the patient, and all equipment
surfaces likely to become soiled during use. The parts of the Senographe Essential that come
into contact with patients must be disinfected before each new patient is examined.
1-1 Levels of hygienic maintenance required

One or more of the following levels of hygienic maintenance will be required by various components of
the Senographe Essential, depending on the type of contact they have with patients and staff. The level
of disinfection required for a patient contact device depends also on the medical state of the patient
examined, and medical procedure used.
The level of hygiene to be applied must be in accordance with your local regulations, practices and
procedures. It is the responsibility of the medical team to determine which level of disinfection is
required.
1-1-1 Cleaning
Cleaning is a process involving detergent or enzymic presoak that removes visible soil (for example
blood or protein substances) from an object.
1-1-2 Low-level disinfection
Low-level disinfection eliminates vegetative bacteria, some fungi, and lipid viruses.
1-1-3 High-level disinfection
High-level disinfection eliminates all forms of microbial life, except for large numbers of bacterial spores.
1-1-4 Sterilization
Sterilization is a validated process used to render product free from viable microorganisms.
sys_hyg.fm Page no. 205 Chapter 25

System Hygiene
2 General precautions for hygienic maintenance

Clean all parts carefully, using a clean microfiber cloth. If necessary, moisten the cloth with a cleaning
agent. Do not allow any drops of cleaning liquid to remain on the surface; extended contact may cause
discoloration.
WARNING
Improper cleaning methods or the use of certain cleaning and disinfecting agents can damage
the equipment, cause poor imaging performance or increase the risk of electric shock. To avoid
possible injury or equipment damage:
- Do not use high temperatures, except for parts that need sterilization.
- Use suitable hygiene products. See "Suggested Hygienic cleaning products" later in this
chapter.
- Clean, disinfect, rinse and dry the parts that come into contact with a patient before each new
examination is started.
- Do not allow liquids to enter the equipment:
Never allow liquids to enter the internal parts of the equipment.
Do not apply cleaning sprays or liquids directly to the equipment; always apply such products
by using a clean cloth dampened with the spray or liquid, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Take great care to avoid any possibility of liquid running into the equipment, for example
around operating buttons and at the edges of moving parts. This is especially important when
cleaning keyboards and pointing devices (mouse or trackball).
If you become aware of liquid entry, disconnect the electrical supply and have the equipment
checked by qualified service personnel before returning it to use.
- Do not immerse electrical or metallic components:
Never immerse equipment parts that enclose electrical components, such as the Bucky/
Image Receptor, in any liquid. They must be cleaned with a soft dampened cloth, taking
special care not to allow liquids to enter the equipment.
WARNING
All parts are sensitive to mechanical damage. While cleaning, avoid accidentally striking or
bumping the equipment with cleaning implements.
WARNING
Always follow the cleaning or germicidal agent manufacturer's instructions and precautions for
mixing, storage, method of application, contact time, rinsing requirements, protective clothing,
shelf life and disposal to help assure effective and safe use of the product.
Chapter 25 Page no. 206 sys_hyg.fm

System Hygiene
3 Precautions for cleaning specific parts

Take careful note of the precautions outlined above in section 2 General precautions for hygienic
maintenance on page 206.
3-1 Cleaning the monitor
It is particularly important that monitors used for viewing mammographic images are kept clean and free
of fingerprints, dust, and so on.
! Notice:
The front panel of monitors can be easily damaged. Take special care not to accidentally scratch
or strike them during cleaning and while working in the vicinity. Use only a soft microfibre cloth,
moistened with water, to wipe them clean.
3-2 Cleaning the digital detector
WARNING
If it is necessary to clean the digital detector when no breast support is inserted, first ensure that
the Gantry and Generator power is switched OFF at the X-ray Console. If the power is applied,
there is a risk of short-circuiting electrical contacts, which would activate the breast support
locking mechanism, pinching and injuring the operator's fingers.
3-3 Cleaning the paddles

Never immerse a complete compression paddle in any Compression plate Paddle arm
liquid.
If necessary, the paddle compression plate and paddle
frame may be immersed in suitable disinfectant solution.
Never immerse the interface plate; it contains metallic
parts which can be damaged.
Paddle frame Interface plate

System Hygiene
4 Suggested hygienic cleaning products

Do not use harsh detergents, abrasive cleaners, or aggressive disinfection/sterilization agents. The
products summarized in the tables below are tested and known to not damage the Senographe system
and its components. The suggested products below have been tested, and found to be compatible with
the materials used in the Senographe Essential.
Table 1 Suggested cleaning products (no contact parts)
Component Suggested cleaning agent
Monitor Water or water with ethyl alcohol (up to 96%)

Footswitches
Gantry readout
X-ray Console
Keyboard
Mouse or trackball
Digital detector
Gantry column covers
Gantry arm covers
Generator cabinet covers
Control Station covers
Radiation screen
Stereotactic Positioner display
WARNING
Always follow the cleaning or germicidal agent manufacturer's instructions and precautions for
mixing, storage, method of application, contact time, rinsing requirements, protective clothing,
shelf life and disposal to help assure effective and safe use of the product.

System Hygiene
Table 2 Suggested disinfection agents (contact parts)
Part Suggested preparatory cleaning agent for disinfection
Compression paddles FDA approved CIP 300, manufactured by STERIS Corporation,

2D Localization paddles PO Box 147, St Louis, MO 63166, U.S.A.
Breast supports
Stereotactic Positioner CE approved Wip’Anios, manufactured by ANIOS. Laboratoire
All parts of the Lateral & Anios, Pavé du Moulin, 59260 Lille Hellemmes,
Vertical approach kit France.
Faceshield
2D Cross hair
Handles
Part Recommended germicide for disinfection
FDA Sani-Cloth HB, manufactured by Professional

Faceshield Low-level approved Disposables Inc.
2D Cross hair
Handles CE Sani-Cloth Active, manufactured by Professional
approved Disposables Inc.
FDA Sani-Cloth HB, manufactured by Professional

Low-level approved Disposables Inc.
Compression paddles CE Sani-Cloth Active, manufactured by Professional

Breast supports approved Disposables Inc.
Stereotactic Positioner High-level FDA CIDEX OPA, manufactured by Johnson & Johnson
approved Medical, Inc., Arlington, TX, U.S.A.
CE Anioxy-Twin, manufactured by ANIOS. Laboratoire

approved Anios, Pavé du Moulin, 59260 Lille Hellemmes,
France.
High-level FDA CIDEX OPA, manufactured by Johnson & Johnson

2D Localization paddles approved Medical, Inc., Arlington, TX, U.S.A.
All parts of the Lateral &
Vertical approach kit CE Anioxy-Twin, manufactured by ANIOS. Laboratoire
approved Anios, Pavé du Moulin, 59260 Lille Hellemmes,
France.
4-1 Rinse after disinfection

Further rinsing or wiping with clean water and drying with a soft cloth must be done to remove any
germicide residue that may remain. Take care to avoid liquid entry to internal equipment parts.
4-2 Dry after disinfection

Use a soft clean cloth to dry the surfaces, leaving no residue.

System Hygiene

Operator messages
Chapter 26 Operator messages
1 Introduction
Any operational anomalies found by the system during Senographe Essential operation are signalled by
Operator Messages. These may be displayed on the X-ray Console, in a pop-up window on the AWS
LCD monitor, or on the Gantry readout. They may be simple information messages requiring no action,
or they may indicate error or fault conditions requiring action from the Operator and/or Field Service
Representatives.
If you need to call your Field Service Representative about an Operator message, you should quote the
entire message or messages, complete with any identification characters.
The following tables list Operator messages which may occur, with explanations and recommended
actions.
- Table 1 Operator messages displayed on the X-ray Console on page 212
- Table 2 Operator messages displayed on the AWS LCD monitor on page 225
- Table 3 Messages regarding breast supports on page 229
- Table 4 Messages regarding FOV on the Gantry readout on page 232
- Table 5 Error messages on the Gantry readout on page 234
errors.fm Page no. 211 Chapter 26

Operator messages
2 Operator messages displayed on the X-ray Console

• These messages begin with a three-character identification code, followed by the message itself.
The first letter of each code indicates the type of message, as follows:
- Exx: Error messages indicating that a non-recoverable error has been detected. The system must
be restarted by switching OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
- Ixx: Information or warning messages indicating operational errors due to temporary fault
conditions or attempts to use non-permitted configurations. It is usually possible to continue use
of the system without reboot.
- Sxx. System exposure messages indicating conditions in which an exposure may not be possible
or has not been correctly terminated.
Table 1 Operator messages displayed on the X-ray Console
Messages on X-ray Explanation Corrective Action

Console
E01 Generator failure Problem reported in HV section Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
of generator. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
contact your Field Service Representative.
E02 Focus bias failure Problem reported in tube focus Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
bias circuits. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E03 Rotor failure Problem reported in anode Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
starter. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E04 Arm fatal failure Generator detected an error in Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console. If the
communication with the Arm. problem continues, note ALL messages and
E05 Failure during Current exposure aborted due to Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
exposure failure in equipment. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
inform your Field Service Representative.
E06 Software error An error occurred in the Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
(gen CPU) Generator CPU software. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E07 Please TURN OFF A generator emergency failure 1. Note ALL messages.
the console! occurred but a second failure 2. Switch OFF the system from the X-ray Console
prevented the system from to quickly switch off the generator.
shutting itself down. 3. Contact your Field Service Representative.
E08 Power supply Supply of generator power Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
failure circuits is not authorized. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E10 Heating failure Molybdenum focal track is Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
track 1 unserviceable. If the problem continues, note ALL
messages and contact your Field Service
Representative.
You can still work with the rhodium focal track.
Chapter 26 Page no. 212 errors.fm

Operator messages

Console
E11 Heating failure Rhodium focal track is Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
track 2 unserviceable. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
You can still work with molybdenum focal track.
E12 Checksum error Calibration parameters have Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console. If the
(gen) been modified. problem continues, note ALL messages and
E13 Gen./Arm Generator cannot communicate Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication fail with the Arm. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E14 Generator CPU/ A problem has been reported by Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
INTG failure the Generator CPU. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E15 Console Generator cannot communicate Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication fail with the X-ray Console. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
E18 IDC/SENO A problem occurred in 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
Synchro. fail synchronization between Image 2. If the problem occurs again at the next
Detection Controller system and acquisition, power OFF the whole system and wait
Generator during acquisition. The for the end of the shutdown sequence.
image may be fully acquired, but 3. Restart the system.
dose parameters will be missed 4. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
(set to 0 in the image). inform your Field Service Representative.
Next exposure is inhibited.
E19 IDC/SENO down, Image Detection Controller 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
DPS is OFF system cannot communicate with 2. If the problem occurs again at the next
Generator. acquisition, power OFF the whole system and wait
The Detector Power Supply has for the end of the shutdown sequence.
been powered OFF by the 3. Restart the system.
system. 4. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
E20 Check Main Supply of Control Station and 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
Distribution Rack Detector environment circuits is 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
not authorized. inform your Field Service Representative.
E21 Detector supply Supply of Detector circuits is not 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
not supplied authorized. 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
E22 Conditioner not Supply of detector Conditioner 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
supplied circuits is not authorized. 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
E23 AWS cart not Supply of Control Station circuits 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
supplied is not authorized. 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and

Operator messages

Console
E24 Failure before Current image acquisition Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
exposure aborted before exposure due to If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
failure in the equipment contact your Field Service Representative.
E25 AWS/SENO A synchronization problem 1. Switch OFF the whole system and wait for the
Synchro. fail occurred between AWS system end of the shutdown sequence.
and Generator during acquisition. 2. Restart the system.
Next exposure is inhibited. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
E26 AWS/SENO AWS system cannot 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
comm. failure communicate with Generator. 2. If the problem occurs again at the next
acquisition, power OFF the whole system and wait
for the end of the shutdown sequence.
3. Restart the system.
4. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
E35 SYSTEM A complete system power OFF Stop system usage and wait for the end of the
SHUTDOWN has been started. shutdown sequence.
STARTED The Generator will power off
supplies to the Detector, Gantry
and Generator in a few minutes.
E36 CART PWR A system shutdown has been 1. Stop system usage and wait for the end of the
FAILURE - started because an UPS error shutdown sequence.
SHUTDOWN has been detected or 2. Check the mains power supply.
communication with UPS has 3. Check (on UPS panel) that the batteries are
been lost. charging. Do not attempt to restart the system until
the batteries have recharged.
I05 Exposure abort by Exposure aborted because not 1. Press the Exposure Interrupt button.
mAs level enough mAs available to 2. Reposition the patient.
continue exposure. 3. Start exam again.
4. If the problem continues, note ALL messages
and contact your Field Service Representative.
5. Nevertheless, you can continue to use the
system with manual acquisition.
I06 Abort: Detect sig. Exposure aborted because 1. Press the Exposure Interrupt button.
out range brightness received by detector is 2. Reposition the patient.
not in range to continue 3. Start acquisition again.
exposure. 4. If the problem continues, note ALL messages
5. Nevertheless, you can continue to use the
system with manual acquisition.
I07 Selected filter not Filter selected by the Operator Press "Filter selection" to select the correct filter.
allowed: Al not allowed.
The Senographe Essential
automatically selects the next
correct filter.

Operator messages

Console
I09 No compression Breast is not compressed. Breast compression is required.
detected
I12 Maximum mAs = Maximum available mAs are Information message only.
xxx equal to xxx. (If mAs exceeded, the exposure is aborted at 2 or
3 mAs if entire exposure cannot be made.)
I13 IDC was not ready Image Detection Control system 1. Press the prep button again.
was not ready to perform an 2. If the problem occurs again at the next
image acquisition. acquisition, power OFF the whole system and wait
I14 AWS was not ready AWS system was not ready to 1. Press the prep button again.
perform an image acquisition. 2. If the problem occurs again at the next
I15 Console locked The X-ray Console is locked due Wait until end of service access.
to service access (detector If no service in progress, power OFF/ON from the
calibration or IQ tool is in X-ray Console.
progress). Actions on right-hand
section of X-ray Console are still
available.
I16 Collimator locked The diaphragm control is locked Wait until end of the calibration.
because a detector calibration is If no calibration in progress, power OFF/ON from
in progress. the X-ray Console.
I17 AWS/SENO comm. AWS system cannot 1. Wait for completion of the service operation if
lost communicate with Generator. there is one, or wait one minute to allow the system
A service laptop may be to recover.
connected in place of the AWS, 2. If the problem persists, power OFF the whole
or the AWS may be powered system and wait for the end of the shutdown
OFF for service requirements. sequence.
I18 Collimator/Console The X-ray Console and the Wait until end of service access.
locked diaphragm control are locked due If no service in progress power OFF/ON from the X-
to service access (detector ray Console.
calibration in progress). Actions
on right-hand section of X-ray
Console are still available.

Operator messages

Console
I19 IDC/SENO comm. The Image Detection Controller Wait until the Image Detection Controller system
lost system cannot communicate with recovers.
the Generator.
If communication is not
recovered in a few minutes, the
system will be in failure mode
(error E19).
I21 Heating failure track Molybdenum focal track is out of Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
1 use. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
You can continue using rhodium focal track.
I22 Heating failure track Rhodium focal track is out of use. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console. If the
2 problem continues, note ALL messages and
You can continue using molybdenum focal track.
I23 Console Generator-X-ray Console Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication fail connection is faulty. If problem continues, note ALL messages and
I24 Line power Micro power cut occurred on line Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
interruption supply. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
I25 Recumbent patient Operator has selected a View If you do not want to make the acquisition with the
view names name for recumbent patient. selected View name, enter and leave the set-up/
View menu without pressing Valid, to return to
normal View name selection.
The View name selection will return to normal
selection after the next exposure.
I27 Generator CPU CPU backup battery is Contact your Field Service Representative.
battery error discharged. DO NOT REMOVE POWER FROM EQUIPMENT.
I28 Max wait for same It is necessary to wait the Wait the required amount of time to repeat
exposure mn displayed time to be able to exposure. If an exposure is attempted before this
repeat the same exposure. time, an abort may possibly occur (there is a safety
margin to ensure proper operation).
You can ignore the message if a different, less
dense, breast is to be imaged next.
I29 Excessive mAs for The amount of mAs necessary to Switch to a different mode or to a different filter.
this mode mAs repeat the same exposure is too
high in the mode selected.

Operator messages

Console
I31 AOP abort: use This error indicates that the Switch to manual mode, or ensure that conditions
manual mode average signal level of the pre- are correct for use of AOP.
or exposure image is too low to - Do not use AOP if the breast thickness
I31 Abort: Image signal calculate the X-ray parameters exceeds 9 cm (3.5 inches).
too low for the exposure. - Ensure that no highly attenuating objects (markers
larger than 2 mm2, needles, etc.) are inside the
AOP sensing zone
- Ensure that the Collimator blades are outside the
FOV.
- Ensure that the compression force and thickness
measurements are correctly calibrated.
- Do not use AOP with a breast containing an
implant.
If the problem recurs frequently after taking the
above precautions, note ALL messages and inform
your Field Service Representative.
I32 AOP abort: use This error indicates that the Switch to manual mode, or ensure that conditions
manual mode average signal level of the pre- are correct for use of AOP.
or exposure image is too high to - Ensure that the breast extends into the AOP
I32 Abort: Image signal calculate the X-ray parameters sensing zone.
too high for the exposure. - Verify that the breast thickness is shown as
greater than 0 cm on the Gantry readout.
If the problem recurs frequently after taking the
above precautions, note ALL messages and inform
I33 Abort: No AOP This error indicates that no - Do not use AOP if the breast thickness exceeds
zone found glandular region was found. 9 cm (3.5 inches).
- Verify that the breast thickness is shown as
greater than 0 cm on the Gantry readout.
- Ensure that the breast extends into the AOP
sensing zone.
- Ensure that no highly attenuating objects (markers
larger than 2 mm2, needles, etc.) are inside that
AOP sensing zone.
- Ensure that the compression force and thickness
measurements are correctly calibrated.
I34 Thickness out of This error indicates that AOP - Do not use AOP if the breast thickness exceeds
AOP range Image Quality can not be 9 cm (3.5 inches).
ensured, because the breast - Verify that the breast thickness is shown as
thickness is outside the AOP greater than 0 cm on the Gantry readout.
thickness range of 0 cm - 9 cm (0 - Ensure that the breast extends into the AOP
to 3.5 inches). sensing zone.
- If the breast is too thick, or it can not be positioned
in the AOP sensing zone, use manual exposure
control.
I46 System Setting in AWS set-up in progress (loading No action required.
progress of Flat Field map) after a new This message appears for two seconds after
filter was selected. selection of a new filter.

Operator messages

Console
I50 Check Pos device The system is in degraded mode: 1. If the installed paddle is not a Senographe
configuration Gantry device configuration is not Essential paddle:
a standard configuration. The a) Remove it.
system functionality is not b) Install a Senographe Essential paddle.
optimum. 2. If the installed paddle is a Senographe Essential
paddle:
a) Remove it and reinstall it.
b) If the warning persists, check with another
Senographe Essential paddle.
b1) If the warning disappears with another
Senographe Essential paddle, the paddle that
generated the warning is not recognized by the
system; the thickness/force measurements with this
paddle are not accurate.
b2) If the warning persists with another Senographe
Essential paddle, the thickness/force measurement
with all paddles are not accurate.
I51 Tube cooling is not The system is in degraded mode. 1. The system can continue to be used but please
efficient The X-ray tube head fan has reduce the cadence of use.
failed. As a result, tube cooling is Add time between exposures and exams to allow
not effective and the tube thermal the tube to cool.
algorithm could not prevent 2. Contact your Field Service Representative to
exposure abort due to tube repair the X-ray tube head fan.
overheating.
I52 Detector calibration Detector calibration for current Contact Field Service Representative.
not optimum configuration has not been done
or has failed for best image
quality. It is recommended that
this configuration not be used.
I90 Auto- The automatic If auto–decompress mode is wanted, switch modes
decompression is OFF decompression mode has been by changing the parameter in the set-up/Medical
inhibited by the Operator. menu. Otherwise no action is required; this
information is normally displayed.
S01 Aborted exposure Exposure in progress has been Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
aborted because the Exposure Start exam again.
Button was released by Operator
before the end of exposure.
S02 Exposure aborted Exposure was aborted because Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
by HV arcing more than eight X-ray tube arcing Start exam again.
events occurred.
S05 Wrong selection of Selected kV/focal track is not Change the configuration.
kV/track couple enabled (kV values are too low in
the Rh focal track).

Operator messages

Console
S07 Exposure aborted The exposure was aborted by the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
by IDC Image Detection Controller. 2. If the problem occurs again at the next
S08 Required power is Power requested in manual Reduce kV or mAs values.
too high mode is too high.
S09 No compression Breast is not compressed. Breast compression is mandatory for AOP.
detected
S10 Generator cooling Generator requires xxxx minutes Wait for cooling period (or select lower mAs values
mn to cool. in manual mode).
S100 PLEASE WAIT ... Generator requires xxxx minutes Wait for cooling period (or select lower mAs values
to cool. in manual mode).
S11 Tube cooling mn Tube requires xxxxx minutes to Wait for cooling to terminate (or select lower mAs
cool. values in manual mode).
S12 Configuration not Incompatible settings of Select compatible settings.
allowed magnification, grid, and focal spot
have been selected.
S13 Backup mAs < 50 Maximum mAs < 50. Wait for cooling to terminate (or select lower kV
exposure inhibited> Exposure inhibited. values).
S14 Maximum mAs Maximum mAs set at installation Reduce the mAs value.
exceeded are exceeded. This message
appears only if a value below the
maximum possible mAs value
was set at installation.
S20 Acq. Abort, image Exposure has been fully 1. Press the Exposure Interrupt button.
can be lost performed but image may be lost 2. Check image quality if image appears.
because an error occurred in the 3. Start exam again.
image chain detection or 4. If the problem persists, power OFF the whole
processing. system and wait for the end of the shutdown
sequence.
6. If the problem occurs again, note ALL messages
and inform your Field Service Representative.
S21 Waiting for AWS Communication with AWS 1. Wait until AWS boot and login is finished.
boot system is not yet established. 2. If message persists 10 min after the AWS login,
power OFF the whole system and wait for the end
of the shutdown sequence.

Operator messages

Console
S22 Waiting for IDC Communication with Image 1. Wait until the Image Detection Control boot is
boot Detection Control system is not finished.
yet established. 2. If message persists for more than 10 min, power
OFF the whole system and wait for the end of the
shutdown sequence.
4. If the problem occurs again, note ALL messages
and inform your Field Service Representative.
S23 Laterality is not You have not selected the Select Laterality on the X-ray Console. If you are
selected Laterality of the breast to perform imaging a test object, the Laterality chosen is not
acquisition. Exposure is inhibited. important.
S25 Tube housing over The temperature of the tube Wait for the tube housing temperature to fall.
temperature housing is too high (> 65°C).
S26 Exposure too long The exposure is too long (this Increase the kV value or reduce the mAs value.
message should appear only in
manual mode).
S32 Compression Breast thickness is badly Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
sensor fault calculated in AOP mode. If the problem continues, note ALL messages and
It is still possible to continue the contact your Field Service Representative.
exam in manual mode.
S33 Wait Until End of Acquisition is inhibited until the No action is required. The display of this message
Digital Acquisit. previous image has been is normal during image transfer to the AWS. It will
completely recorded. be cleared when system is ready for the next
acquisition.
If the problem persists, power OFF/ON from the X-
ray Console.
S37 Exp. Abort, Wait Exposure in progress has been 1. See the message displayed when the Exposure
Image Acquisition aborted by the Operator or the Interrupt button is lit for more information.
equipment but the system 2. Press the Exposure Interrupt button and perform
processed and displayed the the action required by the last displayed message.
generated image.
S38 Abort by HV Exposure was aborted because 1. See the message displayed when the Exposure
arcing, Wait Image Acq. more than eight X-ray tube arcing Interrupt button is lit for more information.
events occurred, but the system 2. Press the Exposure Interrupt button and perform
processed and displayed the the action required by the last displayed message.
generated image.
S39 Abort by IDC, Wait The exposure was aborted by the 1. See the message displayed when the Exposure
Image Acquisition Image Detection Controller, but Interrupt button is lit for more information.
the system processed and 2. Press the Exposure Interrupt button and perform
displayed the generated image. the action required by the last displayed message.
S40 Stereo Config/ After power reset on the X-ray 1. If an examination is already opened, close and
Exam incoherence Console, the system has not open it again.
retrieved the correct 2. If the problem persists power OFF/ON from the
configuration. X-ray Console.

Operator messages

Console
S50 SP present, cannot Stereotactic Positioner was 1. If Stereotactic Positioner is present:
continue exam detected as present with the a) To open the Stereo Medical Application, first
Routine Medical Application close the current exam.
open. b) To use the Routine Medical Application, first
remove the Stereotactic Positioner.
2. If Stereotactic Positioner is not present:
a) Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
b) If the problem persists, shut down the system
from the Browser.
c) If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
S52 System/stereo Gain map calibration has not Contact your Field Service Representative
calibration missing been performed.
S57 AWS/POS AWS cannot communicate with 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication lost the Gantry. Acquisition is 2. If the problem persists, shut down the system
forbidden. from the Browser.
S58 Gantry failure A Gantry failure is active, all 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
Gantry movement is inhibited. It 2. If the problem persists, shut down the system
is not possible to start an from the Browser.
exposure. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
S59 Gantry device The Gantry device configuration Configure the Gantry device in conformance with
config. not allowed does not allow an exam. the medical application:
Unacceptable configurations: - Magnification paddle with Magnification stand
- Magnification paddle with Bucky only.
inserted. - Non-magnification paddle with Bucky only.
- Non-magnification paddle with - No paddle with either Magnification stand or
Magnification stand inserted. Bucky.
- Paddle not correctly inserted. - Paddle correctly inserted.
- Sliding paddle in intermediate - Sliding paddle in defined position.
position. - No gantry paddle with the stereotactic positioner.
- Sliding paddle off-centered - Or set the FOV position in concordance with the
position and collimated view sliding paddle position. See section 5-1 Preparing
position do not match. the equipment on page 76 in Chapter 10
- Gantry paddle and stereotactic Examination steering guide.
positioner both installed.

Operator messages

Console
S60 X-ray beam quality An error has occurred in firmware 1. Check the paddle position and paddle type
error that controls X-ray beam or could display.
affect X-ray beam quality. 2. If the error is still displayed after paddle
It could be the paddle detection repositioning and paddle recognition (paddle name
or the control of the following displayed when paddle is inserted):
devices: tube position (focus a) Wait 10s. If the X-ray inhibition stays active,
size), filter, Collimator, Bucky and power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
locking mechanism. b) If the problem persists, shut down the system
Note that a more detailed from the AWS Browser.
message appears (for 5s) on the c) If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
Gantry LCD display. contact Field Service Representative.
S61 X-ray beam not Firmware controlling the X-ray 1. Wait 30 seconds. If this X-ray inhibition stays
ready beam is not ready for acquisition. active, power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
It may affect control of the tube 2. If the problem persists, shut down the system
position (focal spot size), the from the Browser.
filter, the Collimator, or the 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
Bucky. contact your Field Service Representative.
S81 Image detection One of the image detection 1. Wait for completion of system setting.
not ready components is busy or is not yet 2. If this X-ray inhibition remains displayed for more
ready to acquire images. that 10 min., switch OFF the whole system and wait
S82 Image detection One of the image detection 1. Switch OFF the whole system and wait for the
failure components has failed. end of the shutdown sequence.
S83 Detector The detector environment is not 1. Wait for completion of system setting.
environment not OK correct for acquisition. 2. If this X-ray inhibition stays displayed for more
that 10 min., switch OFF the whole system and wait
S84 Image quality is The temperature has drifted from Check image quality on current exam.
degraded the optimal value specified for If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
best image quality. inform your Field Service Representative.
S85 Detector Detector environment control has 1. Switch OFF the whole system and wait for the
environment failure failed. end of the shutdown sequence.

Operator messages

Console
S86 AWS/IDC AWS system cannot Wait until the Image Detector Controller system
Communication lost communicate with the Image recovers.
Detection Controller system but
communication should recover.
S87 AWS/IDC AWS to Image Detection 1. Switch OFF the whole system and wait for the
Communication failure Controller system communication end of the shutdown sequence.
has failed. 2. Restart the system.
S88 AWS image AWS image delivery to medical 1. If this message stays displayed more that 5 min.,
delivery failure application failure. switch OFF the whole system and wait for the end
of the shutdown sequence.
S89 AWS not available The AWS cannot allow 1. Check that all actions are complete.
for acquisition acquisition because of lack of 2. Increase free space on disk system by deleting
disk space or an incomplete exams that have been archived.
action on AWS. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
S90 AWS not available, No more AWS resources to 1. Close exam.
close exam continue. 2. Increase free space on disk system by deleting
exams that have been archived.
S91 Need user action Operator input is required on Respond to the AWS dialog box.
on AWS AWS.
S92 AWS busy, please The AWS is busy, and the current No action required, wait for completion of the
wait... operation may take some time. current operation.
S93 AWS busy The AWS is busy (the wait should No action required, wait for completion of the
be short). current operation.
S94 System performing An application is running on the Wait a few minutes.
test, wait system and performing tests that
do not allow acquisition (example
auto-diagnostics).
S95 Medical AWS has not yet entered Start a new exam or QAP acquisition.
Application not active application mode. This message
is always displayed after system
boot and after each close exam
even during review.
It appears because no
application is ready to get the
image.

Operator messages

Console
S96 System activity A diagnostic or calibration Check if several applications are running. If yes,
conflict application is running while the close one.
medical application is active.
S97 AWS reset in AWS is being reconfigured. The No action required.
progress, wait message appears until
reconfiguration is complete.
S98 Exp. inhibited CAL/ AWS is being reconfigured. The No action required.
IQ in progress message appears until
reconfiguration is complete.
S99 OFFSET AWS is being reconfigured. The No action required.
ACQUISITION IN message appears until
PROGRESS reconfiguration is complete.

Operator messages
3 Operator messages displayed on the AWS LCD monitor

• Three main types of message are displayed on the AWS LCD monitor:
- Information messages relating to power on/off events.
- Information messages relating to boot/reset events.
- Information messages relating to disk system or memory problems.
Table 2 Operator messages displayed on the AWS LCD monitor
Message on AWS screen Explanation Corrective action

AA These messages relate to power on/off events:
AA1 Error: Could not The specified remote host could 1. Try again after a short wait.
connect to the remote not be found. It may be 2. If the message is repeated, check that
provider ! temporarily off-line, its address the server address is correct and that the
may have changed or been remote application is running.
incorrectly entered, the 3. If the problem persists, contact your
application on the remote Field Service Representative.
provider may not be running, or
there may be a network error.
AA2 ATTENTION Do you This message appears as part of Click Yes or No as required.
really want to SHUT the normal shutdown sequence.
DOWN the complete
system? This action will
stop the workstation
and the X generator!
AA3 End of remote A GE Insite connection is being No action is required; you can now use the
connection in progress closed. system.
AA4 Image detection failure, An image detection subsystem is 1. Wait to see if the problem clears.
exam forbidden not ready for acquisition after 2. If the problem persists, contact your
start-up. Field Service Representative.
AA5 Initialization not A system initialization process is Wait until system initialization is complete.
complete, please wait in progress.
AA6 No Ups Power Backup A UPS error has been detected 1. Stop system usage and shut down the
or communication with the UPS system.
has been lost. 2. Check the mains power supply.
3. Check (on UPS panel) that the batteries
are charging. Do not attempt to restart the
system unless the batteries have been
recharged.
5. If the problem persists, contact your
Field Service Representative.
AA7 Senograph failure, A Senographe (Gantry) 1. Wait to see if the problem clears.
exam forbidden subsystem is not ready for 2. If the problem persists, contact your
acquisition after start-up. Field Service Representative.

Operator messages

AA8 Shutdown Process The AWS shutdown process has 1. Wait for the end of the shutdown
started ... been started because a UPS sequence.
primary power failure longer than 2. Check mains power supply.
10 seconds has been detected. 3. Restart the system when power OK.
AA9 Shutdown Process The AWS shutdown process has 1. Stop system usage and wait for the end
started ... been started because of the shutdown sequence.
communication with the UPS was 2. Restart the system.
lost for more than 30 seconds. 3. If the problem persists, contact your
AA10 Shutdown Process The AWS shutdown process has 1. Stop system usage and wait for the end
started ... been started because a UPS low of the shutdown sequence.
battery condition was detected 2. Check the mains power supply.
(battery power must be available 3. Check (on UPS panel) that the batteries
to guarantee safe operation and are charging. Do not attempt to restart the
shutdown in the event of power system until the batteries have recharged.
failure). 4. If the problem persists, contact your
AA11 System is down. The message appears at the end No action is normally required.
System will power off of the normal shutdown If the system fails to shut down completely
within 30 seconds: do sequence, when the UPS is (the AWS LCD monitor continues to
NOT reboot now! (if about to shut down, to prevent display the message after one or two
system does not turn users from trying to reboot. minutes), switch it off by pressing the UPS
off, switch off UPS OFF button at the front of the Generator
manually) Cabinet.
AA12 System not ready, At system power-up, a 1. If the system is booting:
exam forbidden component may not be ready to A component may not be ready to start the
start the exam. exam.
Click OK on the pop-up and wait until end
In runtime mode, a component is of system initialization is complete before
busy or has failed to start the starting an exam.
exam. 2. If the error occurs in runtime mode:
a) Click on OK in the popup window.
In both cases a more specific b) Power OFF/ON from the x-ray console.
message is displayed on the X- c) Try again to start your new exam.
ray console. d) If the message is repeated, perform
system shutdown.
e) If the problem persists, note all
messages and contact your Field Service
Representative.
AA13 UPS battery needs The UPS selftest has detected Stop system usage and contact your Field
replacing. Please call that the battery requires Service Representative.
service replacement.
AA14 UPS output overload. An UPS overload condition has Stop system usage and contact your Field
Please call service been detected. Service Representative.

Operator messages

BB These messages relate to boot/reset events:
BB4 AWS reset in progress: An AWS boot or reset sequence Wait until system initialization is complete.
please wait is in progress. If several automatic resets occur, contact
The AWS may start an automatic your Field Service Representative.
reset if it detects an internal
acquisition device error.
BB6 Communication with This message appears at the end 1. Wait for the end of the shutdown
UPS not established. of the power-up/boot sequence, if sequence.
Please call service. communication cannot be 2. Try to restart the system.
System will power off established with the UPS. 3. If the problem is repeated, contact your
within 30 seconds: do Field Service Representative.
NOT log in now!
BB8 Remote connection in A GE Insite connection is in No action is required; wait for completion of
progress: do not progress; no new images should the connection.
acquire images be acquired.
BB9 Restart browser must Medical Application Preferences Restart the Browser.
be performed to take settings have been changed, and
into account the new Save has been requested. The
configuration changes will not take effect until
the Browser has been restarted.
BB10 . System currently The system is busy with internal No action required; wait for completion of
performing self-testing - checks and tests. the test.
Please Wait.
BB11 Current processing is Fine View is currently set to 1. If you click QC procedure, you will
for QC purpose only. Disable, which is the perform QC tests without Fine View.
For Clinical application, configuration for Quality Check 2. If you click OK, the dialog box will close,
click OK and enable tests only. the exam will not be started. You need to
FineView in Medical For a clinical use of the system, go to Tools/Medical Application
Application you need to reconfigure Fine Preferences to set Fine View to Enable.
preferences, Image View to Enable. See section 8-3-9 Image Process. on
Process. tab. page 135.
CC These messages relate to internal disk system or memory problems:
CC1 ATTENTION Not Disk system is full. 1. Increase free space on disk system by
enough space to deleting exams that have been archived.
continue 2. If the problem persists, contact your
CC2 AWS Reset failed The Medical Application cannot 1. Check that all actions are complete (e.g.,
allow acquisition because of lack close all pop-up windows) and Increase
of disk system space or an free space on disk system by deleting
incomplete action on the AWS. exams that have been archived.
CC3 Disk space is full, you Disk system is full. 1. Increase free space on disk system by
cannot perform a new deleting exams that have been archived.
exam 2. If the problem persists, contact your

Operator messages

CC4 Image update failed on Disk system is full or server has 1. Close exam.
disk. You cannot save failed. 2. Increase free space on disk system by
your last changes to the deleting exams that have been archived.
exam. 3. If the problem persists, contact your
CC5 Medical Preferences The file containing Medical Note ALL messages and contact your Field
Application was unable Application Preferences settings Service Representative.
to get last settings does not exist or has been
corrupted.
CC6 Medical Preferences The new Medical Application 1. Increase free space on disk system by
Application was unable Preferences settings could not be deleting exams that have been archived.
to save current settings saved, probably because of lack 2. If the problem persists, contact your
of space. Field Service Representative.
CC7 Out of Memory, exam System requirements exceed 1. Perform system shutdown.
forbidden available AWS memory. 2. Start up system.
CC8 Reallocation of disk Disk system is full or server has 1. Close exam.
space failed. There is failed. 2. Increase free space on disk system by
no space available on deleting exams that have been archived.
disk for acquiring more 3. Perform system shutdown, then restart
images. system.
CC9 System disk is full System disk space is full. 1. Close exam.
2. Increase free space on disk system by
deleting exams that have been archived.
3. Perform system shutdown, then restart
system.
CC10 The DICOM image The system is not able to format 1. Close exam.
construction failed. acquired image. 2. Increase free space on disk system by
deleting exams that have been archived.

Operator messages
4 Operator messages on the Gantry readout

4-1 Messages regarding breast supports
Displayed to acknowledge Operator actions such as the selection of a new FOV. A prefix has been
added to the message to order it in the table (the prefix is not displayed on the Gantry readout):
Prefix Topic
(bs ) Breast supports = either Bucky or Magnification stands or Compression Paddles
(bsa) Bucky
(bsb) Magnification stands
(bsd) Parallel sliding paddles
(bse) Parallel non-sliding paddles
(bsg) Flexible sliding paddles
(bsh) Flexible non-sliding paddles
(bsk) Magnification paddles
(bsm) 2D localization
Table 3 Messages regarding breast supports
Messages regarding Explanation Corrective Action

breast supports on
Gantry readout
b Device removed The system has detected that no None.
s device is present. Note that the message appears for 5 seconds.
- This message appears for
5 seconds when the breast
support (e.g. Bucky,
Magnification stand, etc.) or the
Stereotactic Positioner is
removed.
b Bucky present The system has detected that the If the Bucky is not installed, an error has
s Bucky is present. occurred:
a 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
b 1st Spare Bucky The system has detected that the If the system detects this, an error has occurred:
s Bucky detected is not the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
a standard one. It has detected a 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
type of Bucky that should not be and contact your Field Service Representative.
used with the current version of
the software.
b Flexible sliding 19x23 The system has detected that the If the Flexible sliding 19 x 23 paddle is not
s paddle Flexible sliding 19 x 23 paddle is installed, an error has occurred:
g present. 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
The paddle position is not 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
indicated on the Gantry readout and contact your Field Service Representative.

Operator messages

breast supports on
Gantry readout
b Sliding 19x23 paddle The system has detected that the If the Sliding 19 x 23 paddle is not installed, an
s Sliding 19 x 23 paddle is present. error has occurred:
d The paddle position is not 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
indicated on the Gantry readout 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
b Sliding Round spot The system has detected that the If the Sliding Round spot paddle is not installed,
s paddle Sliding Round spot paddle is an error has occurred:
d present. 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
indicated on the Gantry readout. and contact your Field Service Representative.
b Sliding Square spot The system has detected that the If the Sliding Square spot paddle is not installed,
s paddle Sliding Square spot paddle is an error has occurred:
d present. 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
indicated on the Gantry readout. and contact your Field Service Representative.
b 24x31 paddle The system has detected that the If the 24 x 31 paddle is not installed, an error has
s 24 x 31 paddle is present. occurred:
e 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
b Flexible 24x31 paddle The system has detected that the If the Flexible 24 x 31 paddle is not installed, an
s Flexible 24 x 31 paddle is error has occurred:
h present. 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
b 1.5 Mag stand present. The system has detected that the 1. If the 1.5 Magnification stand is installed,
s Remove face shield if 1.5 Magnification stand is present remove the face shield if not yet done.
b present! and reminds the Operator that 2. If the magnification stand is not installed, an
the face shield must be removed error has occurred:
for the diagnostic application. a) Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
b) If the problem persists, note ALL messages
b 1.8 Mag stand present. The system has detected that the 1. If the 1.8 Magnification stand is installed,
s Remove face shield if 1.8 Magnification stand is present remove the face shield if not yet done.
b present! and reminds the Operator that 2. If the magnification stand is not installed, an
the face shield must be removed error has occurred:
for the diagnostic application. a) Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
b) If the problem persists, note ALL messages
b 2D Large Localization The system has detected that the If the 2D Large localization paddle is not
s Paddle. Maximum 2D Large localization paddle is installed, an error has occurred:
m recommended force is present and reminds the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
20daN. Operator that it is recommended 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
to not exceed 20daN with this and contact your Field Service Representative.
paddle.

Operator messages

breast supports on
Gantry readout
b No defined paddle The system has detected that it If you observe this message when a
s does not detect a Senographe Senographe Essential paddle is present, contact
Essential paddle. your Field Service Representative.
b 2D Spot Localization The system has detected that the If the 2D Spot localization paddle is not installed,
s Paddle. Maximum 2D Spot localization paddle is an error has occurred:
m recommended force is present and reminds the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
20daN Operator that it is recommended 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
to not exceed 20daN with this and contact your Field Service Representative.
paddle.
b Round Spot The system has detected that the If the Round Spot Magnification paddle is not
s Magnification paddle Round Spot Magnification paddle installed, an error has occurred:
k is present. This paddle should be 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
used with a magnification stand. 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
b Square Magnification The system has detected that the If the Square Spot Magnification paddle is not
s paddle Square Spot Magnification installed, an error has occurred:
k paddle is present. This paddle 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
should be used with a 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
magnification stand. and contact your Field Service Representative.
b 19x23 Magnification The system has detected that the If the 19 x 23 Magnification paddle is not
s paddle 19 x 23 Magnification paddle is installed, an error has occurred:
k present. This paddle should be 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
used with a magnification stand. 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages
b Unexpected paddle Paddle device error Note ALL messages and contact your Field
s type Service Representative.
b Unknown paddle type The system has detected that the If the paddle is a Senographe Essential
s installed paddle is not accessory:
recognized. 1. Remove the paddle and insert it again.
2. If the message is still displayed after inserting:
b) If the problem persists, use another
Senographe Essential paddle.
c) If the problem persists, note ALL messages

Operator messages
4-2 Messages regarding FOV (Field Of View)

Table 4 Messages regarding FOV on the Gantry readout

FOV on Gantry readout
FOV 9x9 The system has detected that the Press the FOV size button if you want to set
selected FOV is 9 cm deep and another FOV.
9 cm wide. Press the FOV position button if you want to off-
center the FOV to the left or to the right of the
detector. The off-centered FOV corresponding to
the centered FOV 9 x 9 is 9 x 19.
18 cm wide. Press the FOV position button if you want to off-
center the FOV to the left or to the right of the
the centered FOV 13 x 18 is 13 x 20.7.
23 cm wide. This FOV is used in Pressing the FOV position button has no effect for
magnification view only. this FOV.
selected FOV is 19.2 cm deep another centered FOV.
and 23 cm wide, and that it is Press the FOV position button if you want to off-
centered. center the FOV to the left or to the right of the
the centered FOV 19.2 x 23 is 19.2 x 23.
FOV 19x23 Left The system has detected that the Press the FOV size button if you want to set
or selected FOV is 19.2 cm deep another FOV off-centered in the same way. Press
FOV 19x23 Right and 23 cm wide and that it is off- the FOV position button if you want to set another
centered to the left (or right, FOV position for the same format. The centered
respectively). FOV corresponding to the off-centered FOV
19.2 x 23 is 19.2 x 23
31 cm wide. Note: Pressing the FOV position button has no
effect as it is not possible to off-center the
24 x 31 FOV.
selected FOV is 9 cm deep and another FOV off-centered in the same way.
19 cm wide and that it is off- Press the FOV position button if you want to set
centered to the left side of the another FOV position for the same format.
detector. The centered FOV corresponding to the off-
centered FOV 9 x 19 is 9 x 9.

Operator messages

FOV on Gantry readout
FOV 9x19 Right The system has detected that the Press the FOV size button if you want to set
19 cm wide and that it is off- Press the FOV position button if you want to set
centered to the right side of the another FOV position for the same format.
centered FOV 9 x 19 is 9 x 9.
20.7 cm wide and that it is off- Press the FOV position button if you want to set
centered to the left side of the another FOV position for the same size.
centered FOV 13 x 20.7 is 13 x 18.
FOV 13x21 Right The system has detected that the Press the FOV size button if you want to set
20.7 cm wide and that it is off- Press the FOV position button if you want to set
centered to the right side of the another FOV position for the same size.
centered FOV 13 x 20.7 is 13 x 18.

Operator messages
4-3 Error messages

- Advisory messages with a prefix Axx: Displayed to warn the Operator when a requested
operation is not possible.
- Halt messages with a prefix Hxx: Displayed to warn the Operator that a non-recoverable error has
been detected. The system must be restarted by switching OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
- Warning messages with a prefix Wxx: Displayed to warn the Operator when an error has been
detected that does not prevent continued operation.
- Interdiction messages with a prefix Xxx: Displayed to warn the Operator when an error has been
detected that prevents making an X-ray acquisition.
Table 5 Error messages on the Gantry readout
Messages on Gantry Explanation Corrective Action

readout
A02 Compression force lift (Arm elevation) and rotation Decompress the breast (move the paddle holder
is applied movements are not allowed up) if you want to perform a rotation or a lift
because a compression force is movement.
applied.
A03 Compression is not lift (Arm elevation), rotation and 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
operational compression movements are not 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
allowed because the contact your Field Service Representative.
compression device is not
operational. Compression status
is temporarily unknown.
A04 Compression The requested movement is 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
status is unknown refused because the 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
compression status is unknown. contact your Field Service Representative.
A05 Compression 1. Compression release 1. If you have a paddle, remove it to go to the
upper position is movement is stopped because paddle holder upper position.
reached the upper position with the or
current paddle is reached. 2. If the paddle is removed and the paddle holder is
or not at upper position, note ALL messages and
2. The upper position of the contact your Field Service Representative.
paddle holder is reached.
A06 Lift end position is lift (Arm elevation) movement is Move the lift in the opposite way.
reached stopped because the upper or
lower position is reached.
A07 Lift is not lift (Arm elevation) movement is None
operational not allowed because the lift
device is not operational.
A08 Max manual The system has detected that the No more compression is available, even using
compression force is maximum force allowed is manual compression.
reached reached.
A09 Max power driven The system has detected that the 1. Use the manual control to compress more.
compression force is maximum force allowed for 2. If the maximum power driven force is < 20 daN,
reached motorized movement is reached. use the Medical Menu to set a higher value.

Operator messages

readout
A10 Motion stopped. The current movement is stopped Release all footswitches or buttons and wait for all
Multiple movements because another non-compatible movement to stop before pressing on the footswitch
are requested movement is requested: or the Gantry control movement button again.
This advisory message occurs:
A. If you press a Operator
interface (button or footswitch)
during a pre-set movement.
B. If you press a pre-set button
while a previous movement is in
progress (including deceleration
phase).
A12 Move tube head to Rotation movement has been 1. If the Stereotactic Positioner is installed, switch
center position requested with the tube head back to angulation mode and move tube head to
angled away from the center the center position (0°).
position (0°). 2. If the Stereotactic Positioner is not installed, an
error has occurred:
b) If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
A14 Risk of collision lift (Arm elevation) or Rotation Select another Arm Rotation angle.
with floor movement is stopped to avoid a
collision with the floor.
A15 Rotation end The rotation movement is 1. If you want to reach the From Below position
position is reached stopped because it has reached rotate the Arm to +180° (max negative rotation is -
its rotation limit. 165°)
- Max negative rotation is -165° 2. If the system stops before reaching +185° or
- Max positive rotation is +185° -165° position, note ALL messages and contact
A18 Rotation is not Rotation movement is not 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
operational allowed because the Rotation 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
device is not operational. contact your Field Service Representative.
A23 Compression Compression movement is 1. Move the paddle holder up (press the
lower position is stopped because the lower compression release footswitch).
reached position of the paddle holder is 2. If you have the Bucky installed, perform
reached. compression with a paddle intended for use in
- You get this error when you contact views (with the Bucky).
perform a compression 3. If you get this message with a paddle intended
movement without a paddle or for use in contact views (not magnification) and with
with a paddle for magnification the Bucky installed, an error occurred. Note ALL
view without the Magnification messages and contact your Field Service
stand installed. Representative.
A24 Maximum The system has detected that the No more compression is available, even using
compression force is maximum force allowed is manual compression.
reached reached.

Operator messages

readout
A25 Button disabled A Gantry button was pressed 1. If you have pressed a button:
(was pressed at boot). during the boot sequence while If you want to use this Operator interface power
Use other keypad or the Gantry checked its devices. OFF/ON from the X-ray Console. If not, continue to
reboot. The button that was pressed is use the system with this button non-functional.
not functional until the next 2. Even if you have not pressed a button during the
reboot. boot sequence, a Operator interface will not be
functional:
a) To avoid problems during an exam, power OFF/
ON from the X-ray Console.
b) If this message occurs frequently, contact your
A26 Something is To avoid pinching patient or 1. Check if something is pressing on the paddle that
preventing Operator body part between the could prevent continuing or starting a compression
decompression paddle (or paddle holder) and the release movement.
movement face shield (or X-ray tube head), a) If an object is stopping the movement, move this
the decompression motion object to allow motorized decompression.
stopped as soon as a negative b) If the patient is pressing on the paddle, try to
force was detected. change her position to allow motorized
decompression.
2. If error occurs again while space is free, use the
manual decompression.
A50 Breast support The Breast support locking or 1) Release breast support release buttons or slide
locking mechanism is release movement is not allowed the breast support away from its locked position.
not operational because another incompatible 2) Wait until all movements have stopped before
movement is in progress: pressing again on the breast support unlocking
This advisory message occurs: buttons or before inserting again the breast
A. If you press both breast support.
support release buttons during a
compression or compression
release movement.
B. If you insert a breast support
(Bucky or magnification stand)
during a compression or
compression release movement.
A51 Press both breast Only one breast support 1) Release the breast support unlocking button(s).
support unlocking unlocking button is pressed while 2) Press again on both breast support unlocking
buttons to release. both are necessary. buttons.
3) If the problem persists, note ALL messages and

Operator messages

readout
A52 A breast support A breast support unlocking button 1) Check that no object or body part is pressing on
unlocking button is is pressed while it has been a breast support unlocking button.
declared failed declared failed; the breast a) If an object is pressing the button, move this
support therefore cannot be object to free the button.
released. b) If the patient is pressing the button, try to change
her position to avoid her pressing the button.
2) Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
A53 Incorrect gantry Gantry device configuration does Insert the Gantry device in conformance with the
device config. (check not allow an exam. Compression medical applications:
breast holder; paddle; is inhibited: - Bucky or Magnification stand fully locked.
FOV) Unacceptable configurations: - Magnification paddle with Magnification stand
- Breast holder recognized but only.
not correctly locked. - Non-magnification paddle with Bucky only.
- Magnification paddle with Bucky - No paddle with either Magnification stand or
inserted. Bucky.
- Non-magnification paddle with - Paddle correctly inserted.
Magnification stand inserted. - Sliding paddle in defined position.
- Paddle not correctly inserted. - Or set the FOV position in concordance with the
- Sliding paddle in intermediate sliding paddle position. See section 5-1 Preparing
position. the equipment on page 76 in Chapter 10
- Sliding paddle off-centered Examination steering guide for authorized
position and collimated view configurations.
position do not match.
A54 Locking at wrong The Breast support locking 1) Press both breast support unlocking buttons.
pos. Press both breast movement is not allowed 2) Wait until locking release movement has
support unlocking because the mechanism is not in stopped.
buttons insertion position. 3) Insert again the breast support.
H01 Button interface The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient using the manual
comm. failure mode: compression knobs.
- A button failure occurred; the 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
system is set in "halt" state. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- It is not possible to perform any contact your Field Service Representative.
movement or image acquisition.
H02 Compression The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient using the manual
comm. failure mode: compression knobs.
- The compression device is not 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communicating; the system is set 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
in "halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
- It is not possible to perform any

Operator messages

readout
H03 Compression The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient using the manual
control failure mode: compression knobs.
- The compression device has 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
failed; the system is set in "halt" 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
state. contact your Field Service Representative.
-It is not possible to perform any
H04 Internal software The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
error mode: compression knobs.
- An error occurred on the Gantry 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
CPU; the system is set in "halt" 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H05 Internal software The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
H06 Lift communication The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
failure mode: compression knobs.
- The lift (Arm elevation) device is 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
not communicating, the system is 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
set in "halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
H07 Lift control failure The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
mode: compression knobs.
- The lift (Arm elevation) device is 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
H08 Power supply unit The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
comm. Failure mode: compression knobs.
- The Power unit is not 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communicating; the system is set 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and

Operator messages

readout
H09 Reset the system. The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
Reload the SW mode: compression knobs.
state. (occurred only during contact your Field Service Representative.
software upgrade)
H10 Reset the system. The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
Reload the SW mode: compression knobs.
state. (occurred only during contact your Field Service Representative.
software upgrade)
H11 Reset the system. The system is set in emergency 1. Power OFF from the X-ray Console.
Reload the SW mode: 2. Contact your Field Service Representative.
- An error occurred on the Gantry
CPU; the system is set in "halt"
state. (may occur only during
software upgrade)
H12 Reset the system. The system is set in emergency 1. Power OFF from the X-ray Console.
Reload the SW mode: 2. Contact your Field Service Representative.
- An error occurred on the Gantry
CPU; the system is set in "halt"
state. (may occur only during
software upgrade)
H13 Rotation The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
communication failure mode: compression knobs.
- The Rotation device is not 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communicating, the system is set 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H14 Rotation control The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
- The Rotation device is failed; 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
the system is set in "halt" state. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
-It is not possible to perform any contact your Field Service Representative.

Operator messages

readout
H17 Stop motion The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
control line failed mode: compression knobs.
- Stop movement command 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
failure; the system is set in "halt" 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H18 Stop motion line The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
active mode: compression knobs.
- The stop movement button has 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
been pressed; the system is set 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H19 Compression The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
footswitch failure mode: compression knobs.
- Compression footswitch failure; 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
the system is set in "halt" state. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H20 Lift footswitch The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
- lift (Arm elevation) footswitch 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
failure; the system is set in "halt" 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H21 Lift software error The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
mode: compression knobs.
- An error occurred on lift (Arm 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
elevation) device CPU; the 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
system is set in "halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
H22 Halt. Uncontrolled The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
lift motion mode: compression knobs.
- Uncontrolled lift (Arm elevation) 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
movement; the system is set in 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
"halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.

Operator messages

readout
H23 Rotation brake The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
- The Arm rotation brake has 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
H24 Rotation software The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
- An error occurred on the 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
rotation device CPU; the system 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
is set in "halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
H25 Halt. Rotation The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
Uncontrolled mode: compression knobs.
- Uncontrolled Rotation 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
movement; the system is set in 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
"halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
H27 Compression The system is set in emergency 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
brake failure mode: 2. Try to perform compression motion. If the
- The compression device is in problem persists, note ALL messages and contact
fault state; the system is set in your Field Service Representative.
"halt" state.
H28 Control button The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
failure on arm mode: compression knobs.
- An Arm movement control 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
button on an Arm keypad (behind 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
the image receptor, left or right) contact your Field Service Representative.
has failed; the system is set in
"halt" state.
H29 Control button The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
failure on head mode: compression knobs.
- An Arm movement control 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
button on an X-ray tube head 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
keypad (left or right) has failed; contact your Field Service Representative.
the system is set in "halt" state.

Operator messages

readout
H30 Please turn off The system cannot shut down 1. Power OFF on the X-ray Console (immediately in
control console the generator and X-ray Console. case B!).
- case A. Following an Operator 2. If the error occurred during a normal shut down:
request on the Browser. a) Note ALL messages and contact your Field
- case B. Following a generator Service Representative.
error that requested generator b) You can continue to use the system but you must
shutdown. power OFF from the X-ray Console at the next
A system shut down should be occurrence of this error.
requested manually.
H31 Positioner power The system is set in emergency 1. Decompress the patient, using the manual
supply failure mode: compression knobs.
- Gantry power supply failure; the 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
system is set in a "halt" state. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
H32 Tube head control The system is in emergency 1. Decompress the patient using the manual
- Control command from X-ray 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
tube head has failed, the system 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
is set to "halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
H34 Tube head The system is in emergency 1. Decompress the patient using the manual
communication failure mode: compression knobs.
- X-ray tube head control is not 2. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communicating, the system is set 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
to "halt" state. contact your Field Service Representative.
W01 Internal software An error occurred on the Gantry Note ALL messages and inform your Field Service
error CPU that does not affect the Representative at next service maintenance.
current system use.
current system use.
error CPU that does not affect the Representative at next field service Service
current system use. maintenance.
error CPU that does not affect the Representative at next field service Service
current system use. maintenance.
current system use.

Operator messages

readout
W06 Invalid language. The Gantry CPU received 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
Default is used incorrect language information 2. If the problem persists, continue to use the
and will use the default value. system with English language set. Note ALL
The default language value is the messages and contact your Field Service
English language. Representative.
W07 Control buttons An error occurred on an Arm Note ALL messages and inform your Field Service
error control button keypad, which Representative at next field service maintenance.
does not affect the current
system use.
W08 A footswitch is An error occurred on a footswitch Note ALL messages and inform your Field Service
pressed device that does not affect the Representative at next field service maintenance.
current system use.
W09 Gantry Readout The Gantry readout has failed. This message cannot be seen if the Gantry readout
failure has failed. If no more messages cannot be
displayed on the Gantry readout, contact your Field
Service Representative.
W10 Lift calibration The lift (Arm elevation) device is Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
error not correctly calibrated; no Representative.
movement will be available until
the lift device is correctly
calibrated.
W11 Lift control error An error occurred during lift (Arm Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
elevation) movement that does Representative.
not affect the safety control but
the speed profile only.
W12 Lift end position The lift (Arm elevation) 1. Use lift slow speed in the upper and lower limit
exeeded movement has stopped at a area.
firmware limit, but should have 2. Note ALL messages and contact your Field
stopped before. Service Representative.
W15 Rotation The rotation device is not Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
calibration error correctly calibrated; no Representative.
the rotation device has been
correctly calibrated.
W17 Rotation control An error occurred during rotation Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
error movement. It does not affect the Representative.
safety control, but only the speed
profile.
W18 Rotation end A rotation movement has 1. Use rotation slow speed in the upper and lower
position exceeded stopped at a firmware limit, but limit area.
should have stopped before. 2. Note ALL messages and contact your Field
Service Representative.

Operator messages

readout
W21 A button is An Arm movement control button 1. If you have pressed a button:
pressed on the arm on an Arm keypad (behind the If you want to use this Operator interface, power
keypad image receptor, left or right) was OFF/ON from the X-ray Console. If not, continue to
pressed during the boot use the system with this button non-functional.
sequence while the Gantry 2. Even if you have not pressed a button during the
checked its devices. boot sequence, a Operator interface will not be
The button that was pressed is functional:
not functional until the next a) To avoid problems during an exam, power OFF/
reboot. ON from the X-ray Console.
W22 Compression The compression device is not Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
calibration error correctly calibrated; no Representative.
the compression device has been
correctly calibrated.
W23 Compression An error occurred during Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
control error compression movement; it does Representative.
not affect the safety control, but
only the speed profile.
W24 A button is An Arm movement control button 1. If you have pressed a button:
pressed on the head on a X-ray tube head keypad (left If you want to use this Operator interface, power
keypad or right) was pressed during the OFF/ON from the X-ray Console. If not, continue to
boot sequence while the Gantry use the system with this button non-functional.
checked its devices. 2. Even if you have not pressed a button during the
The button that was pressed is boot sequence, a Operator interface will not be
not functional until the next functional:
reboot. a) To avoid problems during an exam, power OFF/
ON from the X-ray Console.
W25 Tube cooling; fan The system is in degraded mode: 1. The system can continue to be used but please
error - The X-ray tube head fan has reduce the cadence of exposures:
failed. As a result, tube cooling is Add time between exposures and exams to allow
not efficient and the tube thermal the tube to cool.
algorithm could not prevent 2. Contact your Field Service Representative to
exposure abort due to tube repair the X-ray tube head fan.
overheating.
W26 Positioner power An error is detected by the Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
supply error Gantry power unit that does not Representative.
affect the safety control.
W27 Positioner power Gantry power unit cooling is in a 1. Note ALL messages and contact your Field
supply over fault condition; the system risks Service Representative.
temperature being set to an emergency state. 2. You can continue to use the system but power
OFF from the X-ray Console as soon as you can.
W28 Switching off Gantry power OFF sequence is Wait for the end of the power OFF sequence.
Gantry in progress.

Operator messages

readout
W29 Paddle detection Paddle detection has failed, or 1. Remove the paddle and insert it again.
error paddle type identification label is 2. If the error persists, try using another paddle.
not aligned with the detection 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
window. contact your Field Service Representative.
W30 Check sliding The sliding paddle is not in 1. Slide the paddle and stop when predefined
paddle position correct position. position is reached.
W31 No defined paddle AOP mode (Automatic If the paddle is a Senographe Essential accessory:
detected Optimization of Parameters) is 1. Remove the paddle and insert it again.
inhibited when the paddle type is 2. If the message is still displayed after inserting:
not recognized. a) Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
b) If the problem persists, use another Senographe
Essential paddle or perform the acquisition in
manual mode.
c) If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
W32 Caution: anti- An error occurred during lift (Arm 1. Be careful when performing lift movements with
collision with floor is not elevation) movement that does the X-ray tube head near to the floor and ensure
operating correctly. not affect the safety control but that the patient's or Operator's feet cannot be
the lift's absolute position is lost. trapped.
A consequence of this error is 2. If the problem persists, take a note of ALL the
that rotation movement can be error messages and contact a Field Service
unpredictable. For example, Representative.
when the X-ray tube head is near
to the floor the rotation
movement will not stop in order to
avoid collision with the floor, or
when the X-ray tube head is far
away from the floor the rotation
movement may stop
unnecessarily.
W34 Automatic force The maximal manual Stop the increase in compression force using
reduction activated compression force has been manual compression.
(high compression reached
force)
W35 Automatic force The maximal manual Stop the increase in compression force using
reduction failed. Do not compression force has been manual compression. Try to reduce the
use high force reached compression force if possible.

Operator messages

readout
W50 A breast support One or both breast support 1) Check that no object or body part is pressing on
unlocking button is unlocking button(s) pressed AND a breast support unlocking button.
pressed. positioner is booting. A. If an object is pressing the button, move this
object to free the button.
B. If the patient is pressing the button, try to
change her position to avoid her pressing the
button.
2) Power OFF/ON again from the X-ray Console
else the unlocking button will be declared failed and
will not allow you to unlock the breast support.
W51 Breast support A breast support release button 1. Check that no object or body part is pressing on
unlocking button failed is declared failed because it has a breast support release button.
been detected being pressed for A. If an object is pressing the button, move this
a long time (more than 5s). There object to free the button.
is no risk to continue the current B. If the patient is pressing the button, try to
exam; the breast support is still change her position to avoid her pressing the
locked. button.
2. Continue the current exam. (Note that message
A52 will appear at next breast support release
request.)
W52 Breast support The breast support locking Note ALL messages and contact Field Service
locking mecanism error device detects an error that does Representative.
not affect the safety control.
X01 AWS The Gantry state cannot allow an 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication failure acquisition: 2. If the problem persists, shut down the system
- The Gantry is not from the Browser.
communicating with the AWS. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- It is not possible to perform an contact your Field Service Representative.
image acquisition.
X02 Bucky The Bucky state cannot allow an 1. Release the Bucky.
communication failure acquisition: 2. Reinstall the Bucky: check that it is correctly
- The Bucky is not installed and switched on (initialization noise
communicating. heard).
- It is not possible to perform an 3. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
image acquisition. 4. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
X03 Bucky control The Bucky state cannot allow an 1. Release the Bucky.
failure acquisition: 2. Reinstall the Bucky: check that it is correctly
- The Bucky device is in a fault installed and switched on (initialization noise
state. heard).
- It is not possible to perform an 3. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.

Operator messages

readout
X04 Collimation The FOV cannot be set at the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication failure correct format: 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- The Collimator is not contact your Field Service Representative.
communicating.
- It is not possible to perform an
image acquisition.
X05 Collimation control The FOV cannot be set at the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
failure correct format: 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- The Collimation function is contact your Field Service Representative.
failed.
image acquisition.
X06 Generator The Gantry state cannot allow an 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
communication failure acquisition: 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- The Gantry is not contact your Field Service Representative.
communicating with the
Generator.
image acquisition.
X07 Invalid bucky type The Gantry does not recognize 1. Release the Bucky.
the Bucky device. 2. Reinstall the Bucky: check that it is correctly
- It is not possible to perform an installed and switched on (initialization noise
image acquisition. heard).
3. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
X09 Compression The Gantry does not recognize 1. Remove and reinstall the paddle.
paddle detection error the paddle. 2. If the problem persists, power OFF/ON from the
- The compression thickness X-ray Console.
cannot be computed accurately. 3. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- It is not possible to continue the contact your Field Service Representative.
current exam, exposure is
inhibited.
X10 X-ray beam form An error occurred during X-ray 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
software error beam format computation by the 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
Gantry CPU. contact your Field Service Representative.
image acquisition.
X11 Tube head The tube focal spot size cannot 1. If you hear the tube tilt motor, the system is trying
communication failure be set: to recover itself.
- The X-ray tube head device is 2. If the message "S61 X-ray beam not ready" is
not communicating. present more than 60s on the X-ray Console, power
- It is not possible to perform an OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
image acquisition. 3. If the problem persists, shut down the system
from the Browser.

Operator messages

readout
X12 Tube head control The tube focal spot size cannot 1. If you hear the tube tilt motor, the system is trying
failure be set: to recover itself.
- The X-ray tube head device has 2. If the message "S61 X-ray beam not ready" is
failed. present for more than 60 seconds on the X-ray
- It is not possible to perform an Console, power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
image acquisition. 3. If the problem persists, shut down the system
from the Browser.
X13 X-ray beam The X-ray tube head device that 1. If you hear the tube tilt motor, the system is trying
adjustment error positions the tube to get the to recover itself.
correct X-ray beam position has 2. If the message "S60 X-ray beam quality error" is
detected an error. present for more than 10s on the X-ray Console,
- The tube focal spot size cannot power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
be set correctly. 3. If the problem persists, shut down the system
- It is not possible to perform an from the AWS Browser.
X14 X-ray beam form The tube focal spot size cannot Note ALL messages and contact your Field Service
calibration error be set correctly. Representative.
image acquisition except during
calibration.
X15 Collimator The Collimator device that 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
command error positions the Collimator blades 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
detected an error. contact your Field Service Representative.
- The FOV cannot be set
correctly.
image acquisition.
X16 Collimator control The Collimator device has failed: 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
failure - The FOV cannot be set 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
correctly. contact your Field Service Representative.
image acquisition.
X17 Collimator An error occurred on the 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
software error Collimator device CPU: 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- The FOV and the filter cannot contact your Field Service Representative.
be set correctly.
image acquisition.
X18 Filter command The Filter device that positions 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
error the filter detected an error. 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
- The filter cannot be set contact your Field Service Representative.
correctly.
image acquisition.

Operator messages

readout
X19 Filter control failure The Filter device has failed: 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
- The filter cannot be set 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
correctly. contact your Field Service Representative.
image acquisition.
X50 Breast support The state of the breast support 1. Power OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
locking mechanism locking mechanism cannot be 2. If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
communication failure determined: contact your Field Service Representative.
- The breast support locking
device is not communicating.
image acquisition (Bucky or
magnification plate could be
incorrectly positioned).
X51 Breast support not The state of the breast support 1) Try to release the breast support using both
fully locked locking mechanism cannot allow unlocking buttons.
an image acquisition: 2) When the breast support is released, remove it
- The breast support locking and insert it again.
device is in faulty state. 3) If the problem persists, power OFF/ON from the
- It is not possible to perform an X-ray Console.
image acquisition (Bucky or 4) If the problem persists, note ALL messages and
magnification stand could be contact your Field Service Representative.
incorrectly positioned).
X52 Breast support The breast support locking 1) Try to release the breast support using both
locking mechanism device has failed: unlocking buttons.
control failure - It is not possible to perform an 2) When the breast support is released, remove it
image acquisition (Bucky or and insert it again.
magnification stand could be 3) If the problem persists, power OFF/ON from the
incorrectly positioned). X-ray Console.

Operator messages

Planned Maintenance
Chapter 27 Planned Maintenance
1 Introduction
WARNING
This chapter describes planned maintenance procedures which must be performed regularly to
maintain safe and effective operation of the Senographe equipment.
Recommended planned maintenance procedures must be performed as specified by Field Service
Representatives, the Radiologic Technologist, and by the Medical Physicist.
2 Planned maintenance performed by the Field Service Representative

Refer to recommended frequency and procedures available in the Senographe Essential Planned
Maintenance Manual (5928276-8EN).
3 Planned maintenance performed by the Radiologic Technologist

These are simple Quality Control (QC) tests which ensure that the system is operating to its design
standards.
Frequency: from daily to twice a year, depending on the task.
Procedures: refer to the Senographe Essential QC manual.
4 Planned maintenance performed by the Medical Physicist

These are tests performed by the Medical Physicist to ensure that the system provides a high level of
mammographic quality (refer to the Senographe Essential QC Manual).
maint.fm Page no. 251 Chapter 27

Planned Maintenance
Chapter 27 Page no. 252 maint.fm

Specifications
Chapter 28 Specifications
1 Technical specifications
1-1 Scope
This chapter concerns only specifications linked to use by the Operator of the system once it is installed
and operational. For more detailed specifications regarding the pre-installation, transportation, storage,
installation and maintenance of your system, please refer to the corresponding Service Publications.
1-2 Electrical specification

Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading.
1-2-1 Line voltage specifications
• Single-phase input voltage (phase-neutral or phase-phase):
- 200/208/220/240 V (± 10%)
• Line frequency specification: 50 or 60 Hz (± 1 Hz)
• Classification:
- Type of protection against electric shock: CLASS 1.
- Degree of protection against electric shock: TYPE B.
• Maximum line current of the system: 42 A at 180 VAC, based on maximum input voltage (30 kV) and
output current (100 mA) of the tube housing assembly.
The maximum line current corresponds to the use of the technique factors 30 kV, Mo track, large
focal spot and 100 mAs or more.
1-2-2 kVA load characteristics
• Maximum instantaneous power (during exposures, up to 6 seconds) 9 kVA,
• Power factor: 0.6.
1-2-3 Input impedance
The apparent resistance of the mains supply RL must be less than that which would cause a voltage
drop of 6% at the maximum power load of 9 kVA. See the table below for relevant values:
Nominal voltage (V ac) 200 208 220 240
Maximum impedance RL (ohms) 0.28 0.30 0.34 0.40
1-2-4 Generator output (excluding tube)

• 22 through 49 kV,
• 20 through 130 mA.
1-2-5 Duty cycle
The generator is always limited by the tube: the generator can supply a maximum of 100 W to the tube.
• For an exposure under 40 kV, the system is limited by the tube mean current (2.5 mA).
Duty cycle is 30 kV/150 mAs exposure each minute.
• For an exposure over 40 kV, the system is limited by the generator mean power (100 W).
Duty cycle is 48 kV/125 mAs exposure each minute.
1-2-6 Line conditioner resonance frequency
• 20 kHz approx.
specs.fm Page no. 255 Chapter 28

Specifications
1-2-7 Generator power (excluding tube)

• 5 kW maximum.
1-3 Maximum tolerance of displayed constants

kV and mAs:
• kV: ± 5%
• mAs: ± (7.6% +1.1 mAs)
Measurement Conditions:
• kVp
Connect an HV voltage divider (Machlett Dynalizer IIIA; ratio 10 kV/1 V) in series with the x-ray tube
and measure the voltage with a multimeter (Fluke 45 or 87).
• mAs
Connect an HV voltage divider (Machlett Dynalizer IIIA; ratio 10 kV/1 V) in series with the x-ray tube.
Connect a waveform analyzer (Tektronix 7854) to the output of the divider; the analyzer receives a
signal proportional to the voltage applied to the tube. The mAs values are given by:
T2
mAs =
 i dt
T1
Where T1 is the time at which the high voltage reaches 75% of its maximum value, and T2 is the time
at which the high voltage returns to 75% of the maximum value.
Compression force and breast thickness:
• Compression Force: ± 10 newton
• Breast Thickness: ±2 mm for non-flexible paddle; ±10 mm for flexible paddle.
1-4 AWS storage

Internal disk system capacity allocated for image storage: 195 Gbytes.
1-5 Digital Detector FOV

• Field of View (FOV) of the Digital Detector: 24 cm x 30.7 cm.
• Digital detector type: GEMS amorphous silicon.
• Image size (in pixels): X=2394 Y=3062
1-6 Main characteristics of the grid

• Linear type
• Number of lines: 36 line pairs/cm
• Grid ratio: R = 5 : 1
• Focalizing distance: F0 = 65 cm
Chapter 28 Page no. 256 specs.fm

Specifications
2 Radiation and filter information

2-1 Source to Image Distance (SID)
• Fixed SID: 660 mm
2-2 Radiation reference axis

Conforming to standard mammography practice, the radiation reference axis is directed at the chest wall
edge of the digital detector; radiation is shielded so that there is no radiation directed behind the chest
wall.
2-3 Leakage technique factors

With respect to radiation regulation, the tube housing and the Collimator are in compliance with DHHS
21 CFR1020:
Leakage technique factors applicable: 49 kV at 2 mA.
2-4 Nominal X-ray tube voltages and currents

• Nominal X-ray tube voltage and the highest X-ray tube current available at that voltage:
49 kV; 61.2 mA
• Highest X-ray tube current and the highest X-ray tube voltage available at that current:
100 mA; 30 kV
• Corresponding combination of X-ray tube voltage and X-ray tube current which results in the highest
electrical output power (3 kW):
30 kV; 100 mA or 49 kV; 61.2 mA
• Nominal electric power given as the highest constant electric power (in kW) which the X-ray
generator can deliver, for a loading time of 0.1 s at an X-ray tube voltage of 30 kV:
100 mA x 30 kV = 3 kW
2-5 Irradiation in AOP mode

• Nominal shortest irradiation time in AOP mode: 40 ms.
• Range of X-ray tube voltage during irradiation in AOP mode: 24 through 34 kVp.
• Range of X-ray tube current during irradiation in AOP mode: 30 through 100 mA.
2-6 Nominal focal spot size

• Large focal spot: 0.3
• Small focal spot: 0.1

Specifications
2-7 Filters and anode tracks

Maximum current for each track/focal spot configuration:
Track
Focal spot Mo Rh
Large 100 mA max. 62 mA max.
Small 40 mA max. 35 mA max.
The minimum filtration permanently installed in the useful beam of the X-ray tube is 0.008 mm aluminum
equivalent (8 µm aluminum equivalent) at 30 kV corresponding to the minimum thickness of beryllium of
the X-ray tube output window.
The switched filters are installed on a disk driven by a stepping motor which moves from one filter to the
other. Two different filters are supplied:
• Molybdenum: 0.03 mm,
• Rhodium: 0.025 mm,
Note:
The system electronics control the filters according to Operator requirements in manual mode, or
to software requirements in AOP mode
TARGET VOLTAGE FILTER EQUIVALENCE
(kV) (half-value layer)
Molybdenum 30 0.03 Mo 0.3 mm Al minimum
Molybdenum 30 0.025 Rh 0.35 mm Al minimum
Rhodium 30 0.025 Rh 0.4 mm Al minimum
2-8 Attenuation equivalence

Attenuation equivalence for components in the X-ray beam (in accordance with FDA HHS 21 CFR,
§ 1020.30; measurements made at a potential of 100 kVp, using an X-ray beam with an HVL of 2.7 mm
of aluminum):
Component Al equivalence (mm)
Magnification stand (1.5 and 1.8) less than 0.35
Image receptor support less than 0.2
Bucky cover less than 0.2
Stereotix positioner less than 0.3

Specifications
3 Environmental Requirements
3-1 Atmospheric Pressure Limits
Atmospheric pressure Altitude (from sea level)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
700 hPa 1060 hPa 0m 3000 m
0 ft 9840 ft
3-1-1 Air conditioning

- Air conditioning must be provided where necessary to ensure that no part of the equipment
(including the generator cabinet) operates in an ambient temperature exceeding 35°C (95°F).
- For patient comfort, ambient temperatures of 23°C ± 3°C (73°F ± 5°F) are recommended.
3-2 Operating Requirements - temperature and humidity

Relative humidity (non-condensing) Temperature
Min. Max Min. Max.
10% 80% 15°C 35°C
59°F 95°F
3-3 Short Term Shutdown Requirements - temperature and humidity

3-3-1 Shutdown with Conditioner on
During evenings and weekends some Operators shutdown the Senographe system via the Control
Station; in that case the Conditioner remains switched on, and the environment must be within the
following limits.
Min. Max. Min. Max.
10% 80% 15°C 35°C
59°F 95°F

Specifications
3-3-2 Shutdown with Conditioner off

During evenings and weekends some Operators shutdown the Senographe system via the circuit
breaker on the wall; in that case the Conditioner is switched off, and the environment must be within the
following limits.
Min. Max. Min. Max.
5% 95% 10°C 50°C
50°F 122°F
3-3-3 Air conditioning

Air conditioning must be provided where necessary to ensure that no part of the equipment (including the
generator cabinet) exists in an ambient temperature exceeding 35°C (95°F) or below 15°C (59°F).
3-4 Transport and short term (<5 days) storage conditions

Relative humidity (non-condensing) Temperature Atmospheric pressure
Min. Max. Min Max. Min Max
5% 95% -20°C 50°C 500hPa 1060hPa
-4°F 122°F
3-5 Long term storage

Special conditions are required by the detector for long term storage. Contact your Field Engineer prior
to placing the Senographe Essential in long term storage.

Specifications
4 Ambient light level

Senographe Essential monitors are adjusted for use in light levels up to 100 lux.
5 Tube information
Tube Cooling Curves and other tube-specific technical parameters can be found in the Tube Product
Data document, part no. 5145113-100, included with the system documentation.
6 Dimensions and weights

Component Dimensions in mm (inches) Weight
kg (lbs)
Depth Width Height
Gantry 1273 (50.1) min. 616 (24.25) min. 1930 (76) 407.5 (896.5)
max. 1842 (72.5) max. 2626 (103.4)
Generator cabinet 640 (25.2) 436 (17.2) 1330 (52.4) 173.8 (382.36)
Control station with radiation 400 (15.75) 710 (28) min. 1875 (73.8) min. 206 (454.15)
shield, AWS LCD monitor, max. 2225 (87.6) max. 217 (478.4)
and X-ray Console
7 Intellectual Property rights

The Imaging Open Platform software used in the Senographe Essential system is the property of the
General Electric Company (U.S.A.). Copyright© 1993-2007 General Electric Company (U.S.A.).
Portions of this software are the property of and copyrighted by:
• Sun Microsystems Inc.,
• The PostgreSQL Global Development Group,
• OSF/Motif,
• J. Schilling,
• Free Software Foundation Inc.,
• Merge Technologies Inc.,
• Cornell University,
• Mozilla Corporation,
• Python Software Foundation.
8 Trademark information
• GE and the GE Monogram, IDI Mammo Workstation and the Mammography Documentation Station
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the General Electric Company.
• DICOM is a trademark or registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• All other trademarks, service marks, logos, company names and product names are the property of
their respective owners.

Specifications

Last_Page.fm Page no. 263

To contact your local GE representative, please go to:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/about/contact-us
China Service Agent Address:

通用电气医疗系统贸易发展（上海）有限公司
中国 ( 上海 ) 自由贸易试验区意威路 96 号 1 幢，邮编 200131
Turkey Importer Name:

GE Medical Systems Türkiye Ltd. Şti.
Esentepe Mah. Harman Sok. No:8
34394 Sisli-Istanbul Turkey
Manufacturer and Manufacturing Site:

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS SCS
283 RUE DE LA MINIERE
78530 BUC
France

Senographe Essential Mastógrafo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Senographe Essential Mastógrafo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Senographe Essential Mastógrafo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Senographe Essential

Operator Manual Revision 3

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page no. 2 Cover_Senographe_Essential_OM.fm

Operator Manual Revision 3

radiation warning.fm Page no. 3

Operator Manual Revision 3

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page no. 4 radiation warning.fm

Operator Manual Revision 3

Favorite links for Operators

Favorite links for Operators

Favorites_for_operator.fm Page no. 5

Operator Manual Revision 3

Favorite links for Operators

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page no. 6 Favorites_for_operator.fm

Operator Manual Revision 3

Chapter 1. Publication presentation

Chapter 2. Standards and regulations

Chapter 3. Safety recommendations

Chapter 4. Product presentation

TOC.fm Page no. 7

Operator Manual Revision 3

Chapter 7. Control Station

Chapter 8. X-Ray Console

Chapter 9. Generator Cabinet

Chapter 10. Examination steering guide

Page no. 8 TOC.fm

Operator Manual Revision 3

Chapter 11. Initial training and set-up

Chapter 12. Startup and shutdown

Chapter 13. User session and account management

Chapter 14. View name selection

Chapter 15. Setting FOV size and position

Chapter 16. AOP and Manual exposure modes

TOC.fm Page no. 9

Operator Manual Revision 3

Chapter 17. Browser

Chapter 18. Worklist

Chapter 19. Modality Performed Procedure Step (PPS)

Chapter 20. Viewer

Chapter 21. Image processing and display

Chapter 22. Printing

Page no. 10 TOC.fm

Operator Manual Revision 3

Chapter 23. Interchange media

Chapter 24. 2D Localization examination

Chapter 25. System Hygiene

Chapter 26. Operator messages

Chapter 27. Planned Maintenance

Chapter 28. Specifications

TOC.fm Page no. 11

Operator Manual Revision 3

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page no. 12 TOC.fm

Operator Manual Revision 3

Chapter 1 Publication presentation

2 How to order a paper version

Publication-Presentation_OM.fm Page no. 13 Chapter 1